Quarterlytics / Residential Construction / The Berkeley Group

The Berkeley Group

bkg · LSE
Claim this profile
Ticker bkg
Exchange LSE
Sector
Industry Residential Construction
Employees 1001-5000
← All annual reports
FY2012 Annual Report · The Berkeley Group
Sign in to download
Loading PDF…
Annual Report 2012
 

ABOUT THIS REPORT 

Welcome to the Annual Report of The Berkeley Group Holdings plc 
(“the Berkeley Group” or “Berkeley”), a publicly owned company, 
listed on the London Stock Exchange within the FTSE 250. 

In this year’s report, we start by highlighting Berkeley’s vision and 
performance this year, followed by an explanation of our business,  
our strategy and how we run our business, and then a trading and 
financial review. Our Governance section and the detailed financial 
statements accompanied by a report from the Group’s auditors, 
complete the Annual Report. 

HIGHLIGHTS 
1  Who we are and what we do 
2  Delivering Value 
6 
7  Managing Director’s Statement 

Chairman’s Statement 

GOVERNANCE 
86  Directors’ Report 
89  Remuneration Committee Report 
106  Corporate Governance Report 

OUR BUSINESS 
8  Our Business 
14  Our Strategy 
18  Our Land 

RUNNING A SUSTAINABLE BUSINESS 
44  Running a Sustainable Business 

TRADING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW 
64  Trading Review 
74  Financial Review 
80  Berkeley’s Principal Operating Risks 

FINANCIALS 
114  Independent Auditors’ Report on the Consolidated Financial Statements 
115  Consolidated Income Statement 
115  Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income 
116  Consolidated Statement of Financial Position 
117  Consolidated Statement of Changes in Equity 
118  Consolidated Cash Flow Statement 
119  Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements 
142  Independent Auditors’ Report on the Company Financial Statements 
143  Company Balance Sheet 
144  Notes to the Company Financial Statements 
148  Five Year Summary 
149  Financial Diary, Registered Office and Advisors 

 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
  
 
  
 
  
 
  
 
  
 
 
 
  
 
  
 
  
 
 
  
 
   
 
   
 
   
 
   
 
   
 
   
 
   
 
   
 
  
 
   
 
  
 
   
 
i

H
g
h

l
i

g
h
t
s

Who We are 
and What We do 

The Berkeley Group Holdings plc (“Berkeley”) is a developer of 
residential-led mixed-use schemes, with a passion for delivering 
successful, sustainable places. 

Berkeley’s focus is on its core markets of London and the South East 
of England where its knowledge, experience and proven track 
record, with over thirty years of experience in this market, give it a 
competitive advantage in the planning and delivery of its schemes. 

The business benefits from a strong balance sheet and good visibility 
over performance in the near-term from cash due on forward sales of 
over £1 billion. Berkeley will continue to forward sell its developments 
wherever possible, keeping financial risk low to mitigate the operating 
risks of delivery, and carefully allocating capital to the right projects at 
the right time, matching supply to demand wherever it can. 

Berkeley’s strategy is dedicated to delivering its long-term  
corporate objectives: 

To maximise shareholder value over 
the long-term in a sustainable and 
safe way, returning £13 per share to 
shareholders by 2021, and to remain 
one of the most successful and 
sustainable businesses in Britain. 

Proud to be a member of the Berkeley Group of Companies 

Berkeley annual report 2012

 1 

HighlightsHighlights 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Delivering value 


Berkeley is delighted to 
report a set of results Which 
demonstrate that it has 
emBarked on its ten-year 
frameWork to return £13 per 
share to shareholders in the 
right Way, delivering a solid 
performance Whilst remaining 
focused on the long-term 
success of the Business. 

proFit BeFore tax 

earnings per share 

2009 

2010 

2011 

2012 

£120.4m 

£110.3m 

£136.2m 

2009 

2010 

2011 

2012 

£214.8m 

71.3p 

60.0p 

72.1p 

121.0p 

return on equity 

cash Due on ForwarD sales 

2009 

2010 

2011 

2012 

16.2% 

13.3% 

15.3% 

21.2% 

2009 

2010 

2011 

2012 

£620m 

£648m 

£814m 

£1,056m 

net asset value per share 

lanD Bank gross Margin 

2009 

2010 

2011 

2012 

615p 

637p 

709p 

839p 

2009 

2010 

2011 

2012 

£2,014m 

£2,038m 

£2,304m 

£2,580m 

2     

Berkeley annual report 2012 

Highlights 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Berkeley’s results for the year ended 30 April 2012 demonstrate a strong 
underlying operating performance which, along with further growth in forward 
sales, a strong balance sheet and a solid land bank, leaves Berkeley well-positioned 
to meet its previous target of doubling its profit before tax from £110 million to 
£220 million by 30 April 2013, some two years earlier than originally planned, 
and to embrace its new operational targets as it heads towards the first targeted 
dividend repayment of £4.34 per share in September 2015. 

The objective to make returns to shareholders in cash, by agreed milestone 
dates, is aligned to ensuring that Berkeley operates at an optimal size in which 
returns must be matched with a disciplined approach to risk management over 
the long-term. To deliver consistent earnings from an efficient balance sheet, 
whilst continuing to build the value of the business in the land bank, Berkeley’s 
core performance targets of Return on Equity and Land Bank Growth will remain 
a focus over the next twelve months. 

Berkeley has maintained its balance sheet strength throughout the challenging 
markets of recent years, and is committed to keeping flexibility at the heart of  
its business plan. This approach is intended to ensure that Berkeley can remain 
agile when faced with what it knows to be an inherently cyclical property market. 

proFit BeFore tax 

operating Margin 

return on equity 

Profit before tax up 57.7%  

to £214.8 million 

(2011: £136.2 million) 

Operating margin before  
exceptional item up 0.5% to 18.8% 
(2011: 18.3%) 

Pre-tax return on shareholders’  
equity of 21.2% 
(2011: 15.3%) 

+57.7% 

18.8% 

21.2% 

net DeBt 

cash Due on ForwarD sales 

lanD Bank 

Net debt of £57.9 million 
(April 2011: net cash of £42.0 million) 

after £311 million of investment in new 

land in the year.
 

Cash due on forward sales  

of £1,055.7 million 

(April 2011: £813.5 million) 

26,021 plots in land bank 
(April 2011: 27,026) and future anticipated gross 
margin in land bank up 12.0% to £2,580 million 
(April 2011: £2,304 million) 

+29.8% 

+12.0% 

A strong underlying performance and 

balance sheet and a solid land bank.
 

Berkeley annual report 2012      3 

HighlightsHighlights 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
highlights 

One Tower Bridge 

One Tower Bridge, SE1 
Area: 3.75 acres 
Homes: c.400 
Developed by: Berkeley 

4     

Berkeley annual report 2012 

 
 
highlights 

i

H
g
h

l
i

g
h
t
s

Berkeley annual report 2012

 5
 

 
The decision for businesses such as Berkeley to invest is finely 
balanced despite the sound long-term fundamentals for 
residential property in London and the South East of England. 
Growth requires a stable political and economic environment 
with well-considered policies that welcome inward investment 
and give businesses the confidence to invest and grow; it is 
essential that London’s competitiveness on a world stage is 
preserved. Unnecessary bureaucracy, over-zealous regulation 
and taxation policy, and a negative rhetoric that undermines 
confidence, create barriers to the delivery of new housing 
which will pose an unwelcome drag on growth. Indeed, 
there are indications across the wider industry that the recent 
upturn in construction levels is beginning to stagnate. 

To remain a truly successful and sustainable business, we 
must respect and impress our customers, investors, partners, 
contractors and the communities within which we operate. 
This can only be done with the right people working at the 
heart of any business, and I continue to admire the passion, 
dedication and hard work of all of our employees at Berkeley. 
I, along with the rest of the Board, am grateful above all for 
their loyalty, and the stability that this brings to the company. 

The Board has positioned Berkeley to give it the best 
chance to prosper and thrive with a truly sustainable 
business model. With the right conditions, both 
economically and politically, I am confident that Berkeley 
will achieve this, but this confidence must inevitably be 
tempered by the need to react to prevailing market 
conditions, however they develop.” 

Tony Pidgley  
Chairman 

chairMan’s stateMent
 

“I am delighted to report a strong performance again this 
year. Basic earnings per share have increased by 67.8%,  
our balance sheet remains strong and forward sales stand  
at over £1 billion. 

Last year Berkeley put in place a ten-year framework to 
return £13 per share by September 2021 with the 
overwhelming support of shareholders and has been laying 
the foundations to ensure that we retain a strong, sustainable 
business, which can endure well beyond this period. This 
set of results demonstrates that we have embarked on this in 
the right way, delivering solid performance whilst remaining 
focused on the long-term success of the business. 

Against a backdrop of a challenging economic outlook, 
both in the UK and abroad, creating the conditions in which 
businesses can stimulate growth has become a political 
imperative. New housing is uniquely placed to deliver 
growth; it is a sector that delivers employment both during 
and after the development process and stimulates activity 
throughout the supply chain in manufacturing and service 
industries. Since repositioning its strategy in February 2009 
following the collapse of Lehman Brothers and at the height 
of the banking crisis, Berkeley has invested over £1 billion 
in new land and a further £2 billion breathing new life into 
disconnected communities and delivering new homes. Over 
this same period, we have created over 6,000 new jobs in 
delivering new housing across our sites; a contribution to 
the economy which should not be overlooked. 

We have achieved this over a period in which the industry has 
seen unprecedented change, with the removal of the South 
East Plan, the introduction of the National Planning Policy 
Framework and the implementation of changes to the way in 
which new housing contributes to local communities through 
the introduction of the Mayoral Community Infrastructure Levy 
alongside Section 106 contributions. Whilst I support the joint 
objective of these initiatives to increase local engagement and 
supply, the implementation of these new policies has created 
numerous practical issues that have yet to be resolved. These 
include the role that localism plays in development on a large 
scale and how to ensure that the delivery of new housing is 
commercially viable in an environment where planning 
authorities and government place ever increasing financial 
burdens on developers. 

“Berkeley has been laying  
the foundations to ensure 
that we retain a strong,  
sustainable business.” 

6     

Berkeley annual report 2012 

Highlights 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Managing Director’s 
stateMent 

“It is pleasing to report a tremendous year of performance 
and growth for Berkeley. Profit before tax increased 57.7% 
to £214.8 million from £136.2 million the previous year and 
basic earnings per share are up 67.8% to 121.0 pence per 
share reflecting both underlying earnings growth and the 
reduction in the rate of corporation tax. Pre-tax return on 
shareholders’ equity, one of Berkeley’s two core performance 
targets, was 21.2% up from 15.3% a year earlier on 
shareholders’ equity that increased by £170.4 million to 
£1,099.8 million in the period. 

The second core annual performance target is growth in the 
value of the Group’s land bank in line with our strategy to 
invest in land. The further investment of some £311 million 
in land acquisitions during the year contributed to growth  
of the potential gross margin in the land bank by 12.0% to 
£2,580 million and exceeds the targets set at the beginning 
of the year. This investment has continued into the new 
financial year with the acquisition of 15 acres in Zone 1  
at Wapping for £150 million, payable in instalments, as 
announced in May 2012. 

Importantly, the results also demonstrate the continued 
strengthening of the balance sheet and management of 
key operating risks, above all through an increase in cash 
due on forward sales to £1,056 million which underpins our 
investment in future delivery; an enhancement in the quality 
of our land bank in which some 84% is now fully consented; 
and an increase in banking facilities to £525 million, 
extended until April 2017, providing financial security 
well beyond the first planned date of shareholder returns. 

Looking forward, we have updated our operating guidance 
which is aligned to returning some £568.5 million to 
shareholders, equivalent to £4.34 per share, by September 
2015, whilst maintaining our balance sheet at least at 
the current level. The Group is currently well-positioned,  
with the land bank and planning consents now in place, 
to achieve this guidance assuming overall market 
conditions remain resilient. 

The Board also believes that there remain opportunities to 
add further shareholder value over the long-term through 
additional land investment at this point in the cycle and 
has maintained its target for land bank growth in the next 
financial year at 10%. We will also now aim to meet our 
objective to grow the value in the land bank to £3 billion, 
by April 2014, one year earlier than originally intended. 

The objective to return some £568.5 million in cash to 
shareholders by September 2015 places a responsibility 
on the Board to maintain strong discipline in its investment 
strategy. The challenge is to balance the return of £13 per 
share in cash to existing shareholders over the remaining 
nine years of the plan with our continued investment in land 
and construction. It is forecast that we will continue to invest 
retained profits into land and construction until 2014 before 
generating the cash flow to pay the first dividends. The 
Board is giving further consideration to ways in which share 
buybacks can be integrated into this overall framework, 
where it believes that this can create additional long-term 
shareholder value. 

This is an exciting stage in the cycle for Berkeley.  
Our objectives are clear, and through the framework of  
Vision2020 our stakeholders have specific, identifiable 
commitments which focus every area of the business; these 
commitments have been diligently and enthusiastically 
embraced by all. I firmly believe that we have the right 
strategy, and the right people to implement the operational 
plan, to give the company, our shareholders and our wider 
stakeholders confidence in Berkeley’s ability to deliver its 
objectives over the long-term. 

Our approach brings with it an appreciation that we are 
positioned well to outperform, with an unrivalled land bank, 
a strong balance sheet, a healthy forward sales position and 
a stable, experienced management team, but we recognise 
that we are operating in an uncertain market and must remain 
sensitive to changes in the market and the wider economy.” 

Rob Perrins 
Managing Director 

“This is an exciting stage in the 
cycle for Berkeley. I firmly believe 
that we have the right strategy  
for Berkeley to deliver its 
objectives over the long-term.” 

Berkeley annual report 2012

 7 

HighlightsHighlights  
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
 
  
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
  
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
  
 
 
our Business 

our Business 
Berkeley is a residential-
led property developer 
With a passion for 
creating successful, 
sustainaBle places. 

8     

Berkeley annual report 2012 

 
  
  
  
our Business 

O
u
r
B
u
s
i
n
e
s
s

Berkeley annual report 2012

 9
 

 
 
our Business 

Prestigious schemes in the heart 
of the Capital offering the very 
best in luxury living. 

1 The Tower, 

One St. George Wharf, SW8 
overlooking the river 
thames and the houses  
of parliament, the tower,  
one st. george Wharf  
will, at 50 storeys, be  
one of europe’s tallest  
residential towers. 

2 Ebury Square, Belgravia, SW1 

ebury square lies in the 
heart of Belgravia, one of 
london’s most distinguished 
neighbourhoods. 

3 190 Strand, WC2 

a luxurious new development 
situated in an historic 
location, overlooking 
sir christopher Wren’s grade i 
listed st clement danes 
church, and close to the 
courtauld gallery and 
somerset house. 

1 

10  Berkeley annual report 2012 

All the above are computer generated images which are indicative only. 

 
  
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
our Business 

O
u
r
B
u
s
i
n
e
s
s

2 

3 

All the above are computer generated images which are indicative only. 

Berkeley annual report 2012

 11
 

 
 
our Business 

our Business 

Berkeley has a simple 
Business model Which 
plays to its strengths 
and expertise. 

The Group makes money for its shareholders by  
developing and selling homes, whether city apartments 
or detached family houses, student residences, Extra  
Care accommodation or shops and restaurants, across 
London and the South East of England. 

Berkeley’s principal operating activities are to identify and buy 
development sites, secure suitable viable planning consents, 
and then construct and deliver homes for its customers. 

Berkeley’s long-term corporate objectives are to maximise 
shareholder value in a sustainable and safe way, returning 
£13 per share to shareholders by 2021, and to retain a 
successful and sustainable business thereafter. 

12  Berkeley annual report 2012 

Our Business 
 
 
 
 
No.1 Street, Royal Arsenal Riverside, SE18 
one of london’s largest  
regeneration schemes 

Berkeley believes that its focus
on creating not just homes, but
thriving, successful places is
what sets it apart from its peers. 

LaND 

PRODuCT 

The Group employs experienced, committed staff whose 
role is to identify potential new site acquisitions which  
meet Berkeley’s challenging acquisition criteria. Berkeley 
continues to operate in its core markets of London and the 
South East of England, where it has a competitive advantage, 
and acquires new sites opportunistically only in those 
locations where market demand supports such investment. 
Each new site acquisition is rigorously assessed to ensure 
that the Group can give a wholehearted commitment to 
invest in the planning and delivery of a scheme based on  
its underlying financial viability and an understanding of 
the significant operational risks of development. 

PLaNNiNg 

The priority on new land is to eliminate planning risk 
quickly and effectively, to secure a viable, implementable 
planning consent appropriate to the location, demand  
and context of each site. This is carried out in a spirit of 
engagement and dialogue with local communities and 
stakeholders impacted by these schemes. The Group  
also maintains a disciplined approach to optimisation,  
and fosters a culture of improvement in which consented 
schemes are continually reassessed to ensure that they 
remain appropriate to the location and to the local market 
and demand, which itself can evolve in terms of the mix  
of homes or planning uses. More relevant on the Group’s 
longer-term schemes, Berkeley considers it right to look 
regularly at what is planned to be delivered, and to 
continually challenge itself to improve this. 

DeLiveRy 

With a focus on sales early in the delivery process, Berkeley 
aims to reduce financial risk before investing in the capital 
intensive phase of construction. This is Berkeley’s way of 
ensuring that supply meets demand, tailoring its product 
and delivery to the demands of the market at prices which 
it knows are supported in each location. The Group is 
committed to a considerate and sustainable approach  
to the design and construction of its schemes, with clear 
direction from the Board, which champions, through  
Vision2020, a framework of clear, modern and focused 
sustainability practices. 

Berkeley’s product is spread across a wide target market,  
at a range of affordability levels. This includes its core 
product of residential apartments and houses, as well as 
diversified product such as student accommodation and 
Extra Care accommodation. There is a commitment to 
quality across its entire portfolio which Berkeley believes  
will continue to underpin its brand and reputation, now and 
in the future. Customer satisfaction is a key performance 
measure; third party surveys are instructed by Berkeley  
on all sales of new homes and results fed back to inform 
Berkeley’s future product and approach. 

PLaCeMakiNg 

Across all phases of the development cycle, Berkeley 
believes that its focus on creating not just homes, but 
thriving, successful places is what sets it apart from its peers 
and is at the heart of its success over recent years. From 
Putney Wharf in London, to Gunwharf Quays in Portsmouth, 
or the regeneration of the Royal Arsenal buildings and docks 
at Woolwich, this has remained central to Berkeley’s priorities. 

iNNOvaTiON aND agiLiTy 

Outside of its core activities, Berkeley has found innovative 
ways to enhance value in the business, whether delivering 
schemes in partnership with the Prudential, the sale of 
postgraduate accommodation constructed for Imperial 
College London, or delivering and investing in rental 
properties with the Housing and Communities Agency. 
Berkeley remains alert to such opportunities as they arise; 
an attribute which is integral to maintaining a flexible, 
agile business, and has a business model which allows this, 
with balance sheet strength, financial capacity and the 
discipline of a programme of shareholder returns. 

Berkeley’s experience and understanding is that the 
property market is inherently cyclical, an understanding 
which has been at the heart of its success in the past, 
and is central to its strategy to meet its stated long-term 
corporate objectives. 

BRaNDs aND PeOPLe 

Berkeley has autonomous management teams operating 
under five core brands: Berkeley; St George; St James;  
St Edward; and Berkeley First. These teams operate across 
all the disciplines of the business, and comprise those 
people charged with implementing the Group’s strategy  
to deliver its long-term corporate objectives. 

Berkeley annual report 2012

 13 

Our BusinessOur Business 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
our strategy 

The Tower, One St. George Wharf, SW8 
view from the sky garden on 8th floor 

Berkeley is a Business 
focused on securing 
and delivering 
long-term value. 

Berkeley’s strategy is dedicated to delivering its long-term 
corporate objectives to ‘maximise shareholder value over 
the long-term in a sustainable and safe way, delivering  
£1.7 billion in cash to shareholders over the next 10 years’ 
and ‘by 2020, to remain one of the most successful and 
sustainable businesses in Britain’. 

Berkeley’s aim is to deliver the targeted shareholder returns 
from earnings, and to invest opportunistically in new sites 
and optimise existing sites to underpin the business 
in the long-term. 

To meet these objectives, the Group will continue to focus on 
organic growth in its core markets of London and the South 
East of England. This is where its knowledge, experience and 
proven track record, with over thirty years of experience in this 
market, give it a competitive advantage in the planning and 
delivery of its schemes. 

The business benefits from a strong balance sheet and good 
visibility over performance in the near-term from cash due 
on forward sales of over £1 billion. Berkeley will continue to 
forward sell its developments wherever possible, keeping 
financial risk low to mitigate the operating risks of delivery, 
and carefully allocating capital to the right projects at the 
right time, matching supply to demand wherever it can. 

Berkeley believes that the requirement to make returns to 
shareholders, in cash, by agreed milestone dates is aligned 
to ensuring Berkeley operates at an optimal size in which 
returns must be matched with a disciplined approach to  
risk management over the long-term. 

Dial Arch pub at Royal Arsenal Riverside, SE18 

People enjoying a restaurant at Imperial Wharf, SW6 

14  Berkeley annual report 2012 

Our Business 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
our Business 

O
u
r
B
u
s
i
n
e
s
s

Flexibility in its business plan affords Berkeley the ability to 
act quickly and decisively when faced with opportunities to 
add value outside of the normal development cycle. This has 
been evidenced over the last two years through the creation 
of Berkeley’s rental fund, in partnership with the Homes and 
Communities Agency, which promoted the delivery of a 
number of schemes across Berkeley’s portfolio where rental 
demand has been strong and which now benefit both Berkeley 
and the Homes and Communities Agency through a portfolio 
of properties generating solid market rental returns. 

Operationally, to succeed in meeting its objectives, the 
Group needs all of its employees to understand the long-term 
Berkeley vision, and to give them the framework to embed the 
concept of a ‘sustainable business’ in all of their dealings and 
decisions. This is the role of Vision2020, which provides clear 
guidelines and commitments within which all of our people 
can operate at all levels of the business. This in turn sets 
clear benchmarks, which Berkeley can report to its wider 
stakeholders to demonstrate that Berkeley is the right 
developer and partner for the long-term. Berkeley’s approach 
to running a sustainable business is explained further in 
a separate chapter of this report under that heading. 

To implement this strategy, Berkeley relies on the 
recruitment and retention of the best people. A clear 
philosophy founded on integrity, a challenging and fulfilling 

working environment and competitive remuneration is  
key to achieving this. Berkeley’s people have embraced 
Vision2020, and have been integral to the successful first 
year of the Berkeley Foundation, which spearheads 
Berkeley’s Corporate Social Responsibility programme. 
Wholehearted engagement of Berkeley with its people,  
and their engagement with Berkeley and its wider 
stakeholders, is fundamental to its strategy to be one 
of the best and most sustainable businesses in Britain. 

The ultimate success of this strategy will be measured 
through performance against the long-term corporate 
objectives. Berkeley is a business focused on securing and 
delivering long-term value. To deliver consistent earnings 
from an efficient balance sheet, whilst continuing to build 
the value of the business in the land bank, Berkeley’s core 
performance targets of Return on Equity and Land Bank 
Growth will remain a focus over the next twelve months. 

This year, a return on equity of 21.2% (2011: 15.3%), 
continuing growth in land bank margin of 12.0% to 
£2,580 million (2011: £2,304 million) and a strong balance  
sheet in which total equity now stands at £1,099.8 million 
(2011: £929.4 million) are the solid foundations in 2012 
which demonstrate that the business has embarked on the 
route towards these long-term objectives in the right way. 

Berkeley annual report 2012

 15 

Our BusinessOur Business 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
  
 
 
our Business 

Goodmans Fields and 
75 Leman Street, Aldgate 
Area: 7.2 acres 
Homes: c.900 
Developed by: Berkeley 

16  Berkeley annual report 2012 

  
 
 
our Business 

GOODMANS FIELDS 
& 75 LEMAN STREET 

O
u
r
B
u
s
i
n
e
s
s

Berkeley annual report 2012

 17 

 
 
our lanD
 

Berkeley’s schemes: 
are centred on its core 
markets of london... 

35 

3 

6 

10 

40 

lonDon 

27 

10 

11 

17 

7 
9 

22 

4 

30 

14 

7 

26 

8 
6 

5 
38 

23 

5 

33 

25 

4 

20 

31 

11 

1

2 

1 
16 

14 

13 

13 

3 

8 

29

15 
2 

12 

28 

21 

39 

24

32 

12 

18 19 

9 
36 

37 

34 

18  Berkeley annual report 2012 

Our Business 
  
 
1  375 Kensington High Street 

40  Woodberry Park 

Computer generated images are indicative only. 

13  Fulham Reach, Hammersmith 

Computer generated images are indicative only. 

London
 

london under construction 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

11 

12 

13 

14 

15 

16 

17 

18 

19 

20 

375 kensington high street 
Battersea reach 
Beaufort park, hendon 
Blackheath road, deptford 
camberwell grove 
carmelite, finchley* 
caspian Wharf, Bow 
chelsea creek / imperial Wharf 
costume store, acton 
dickens yard, ealing 
ebury square, Belgravia 
emerald square, roehampton 
fulham reach, hammersmith 
goodmans fields, aldgate 
griffon studios, clapham 
grosvenor Waterside 
napier, acton 
kew Bridge road 
kew Bridge West, Brentford 
kidbrooke village 

* sites purchased during the year 

21 

22 

23 

24 

25 

26 

27 

28 

29 

30 

31 

32 

33 

34 

35 

36 

37 

38 

39 

40 

langham square, putney 
lime grove mews, hammersmith 
marine Wharf, deptford 
marryat place, Wimbledon* 
onese8, deptford 
one tower Bridge 
parkwest, West drayton 
Queen mary’s place, roehampton 
riverlight, Battersea 
roman house, city of london 
royal arsenal riverside 
saffron square, croydon 
st catherine’s place, new cross 
st James park mews, surbiton 
stanmore place 
terrace yard, richmond 
the Boatyard, kingston 
the tower, one st george Wharf 
Wimbledon hill park 
Woodberry park 

london future sites 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

11 

12 

13 

14 

190 strand, city of london
 
abell & cleland house, Westminster
 
carnwath road, fulham
 
city forum, city of london*
 
eastbury house, albert embankment*
 
hampton house, albert embankment*
 
nec house, acton*
 
one Blackfriars, southwark*
 
Queen’s rise, richmond*
 
section house, finchley*
 
sir alexander close, acton
 
twickenham sorting office*
 
Warwick road, kensington (telereal)
 
Warwick road, kensington (homebase)
 

Berkeley annual report 2012

 19 

Our BusinessOur Business 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
our lanD
 

...and the south east 
of england 

5 

Canterbury 

10  Esher 

7  Cirencester 

20  Berkeley annual report 2012 

Our Business 
 
E  

H I R

S

N

P T O

CAMBRIDGESHIRE 

4 

MILTON 
KEYNES 

E
R
I
H
S
D
R
O
F
D
BE

SUF FOL K  

E 

D S HIR

ESSE  X 

WA RWICKSHIRE 

RT H A M

NO

W

O

R

C

E

S

23 

T

E

R

S

H

I

R

E

5  6 

GLOUCESTERSHIRE 
GLOUCESTERSHIRE 

7 

B

U

C

K

I

N

G

27 

20 

R

O

F
T
25 

R

E

H

1 

H

A

M

S

OXFORDSHIRE 

26 

15 

16 

H

IR
2 

3 
E 
11 

8 

LONDON 

WI LT SHIRE 

9 

2 

22 
BERKSHIRE 

1 

12 

10 

10 
7 

9 

6 
13 
15 
SUR REY 
11 

12 

13 

17 

4 

24 

5

K E N T  

14 

HAMPSHIR E 

18 

3 

WEST  SUSSEX 

EAST  SUSSEX 

14 

21 

19 

8 

South East
 

out of london under construction 

out of london future sites 

16 

17 

18 

19 

20 

21 

22 

23 

24 

25 

26 

27 

high Wycombe 
holborough 
horsham 
north Bersted 
oxford (2 sites) 
portsmouth 
reading 
Worcester 
sevenoaks 
st albans 
Wantage 
Woodstock 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

11 

12 

13 

14 

15 

Basingstoke 
Beaconsfield 
Billingshurst 
cambridge 
canterbury 
cheltenham 
cirencester 
eastbourne 
effingham 
esher 
farnham common 
fleet (2 sites) 
gillingham 
gosport 
guildford 

* sites purchased during the year 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

11 

12 

13 

14 

15 

amersham*
 
ascot (2 sites)
 
Beaconsfield
 
caterham*
 
cheltenham*
 
claygate
 
cobham
 
gerrards cross (2 sites)*
 
maidenhead*
 
oxshott*
 
reigate
 
shalford*
 
tadworth (2 sites)*
 
tunbridge Wells*
 
Wantage
 

Berkeley annual report 2012

 21 

Our BusinessOur Business 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
190 Strand Lobby, WC2 
Area: 1.2 acres 
Homes: c.200 
Developed by: St. Edward 

22  Berkeley annual report 2012 

Our Business 
 
our Business 

O
u
r
B
u
s
i
n
e
s
s

Computer generated images are indicative only. 

Berkeley annual report 2012

 23
 

 
 
our lanD 
DelivereD this year 

during 2012, Berkeley delivered 
3,565 neW homes across its 
portfolio of developments  
in london and the south east 
of england. 

The breadth of homes delivered stretches from modern new build apartment 
schemes on prime stretches of the River Thames, to major regeneration schemes 
in Greater London, along with new build and restoration family housing schemes 
outside London. 

Across Berkeley’s waterfront schemes in London, the first phase of homes  
at Chelsea Creek was delivered in the year, along with a new spa and leisure 
complex serving these apartments, as were the first new homes at Kew Riverside 
and further sales in the latest phase at Battersea Reach. The apartments at 
Chelsea Creek are the first of a total of some 900 homes to be constructed  
in this new waterside location adjacent to Imperial Wharf. 

There was a further phase of occupations at Berkeley’s major regeneration 
schemes at Woodberry Park, Kidbrooke Village and Royal Arsenal Riverside  
in the year, in addition to new sales at established schemes including Beaufort  
Park in Hendon and Queen Mary’s Place in Roehampton. Outside London,  
new housing delivered at Edenbrook in Fleet and Queens Acre in Beaconsfield  
are on schemes designed to form vibrant new communities in harmony with  
their surroundings. 

This year, Berkeley also delivered the first phase of high-specification 
postgraduate student accommodation for Imperial College at Griffon Studios 
near Clapham Junction, first occupied by Imperial’s students in October 2011, 
with the second phase due for delivery in September 2012. Student schemes 
at the Costume Store in Acton and at Dorset House in Oxford are due for 
delivery in the next financial year. 

Queens Acre, Beaconsfield 
area: 6.8 acres 
homes: 50 
developed by: st. James 

24  Berkeley annual report 2012 

Our BusinessO
u
r
B
u
s
i
n
e
s
s

Berkeley annual report 2012

 25 

Our BusinessOur Business 
 
our lanD 
DelivereD this year 

Chelsea Creek, SW6 
area: 10 acres 
homes: c.900 
developed by: st george 

26  Berkeley annual report 2012 

The redevelopment of a former gas works and an historic dock basin and lock in 
Fulham, the completed scheme will provide 889 homes over nine residential blocks 
and an office building, with contemporary architecture based on dockside living 
in Amsterdam and Copenhagen. Purchasers started taking occupation of the first 
phase in early 2012. The site benefits from the amenities of Imperial Wharf and 
Chelsea Harbour close by, the convenience of the new Imperial Wharf station 
delivered by St George, and the on-site residents’ only health and fitness centre 
with swimming pool, sauna, steam room and gymnasium. 

Our Business 
 
  
 
 
 
  
Edenbrook, Hampshire 
area: 54 acres 
homes: c.300 
delivered by: Berkeley 

A ground-breaking development in 
Hampshire, new residential homes are 
bordered by an 84 acre country park 
developed by Berkeley, which includes 
cycle paths, walkways, boardwalks, 
brooks and meadowlands, having been 
subject to extensive ecological study 
and an approach to preserve and 
encourage wildlife to evolve within the 
park. Designed to integrate its 
surroundings, and to take inspiration 
from the Arts and Crafts movement, 
each home has been carefully positioned 
to maximise its aspect and views, and 
benefits from Berkeley’s exceptional 
specification and attention to detail. 
With the first phases of homes now 
delivered at Edenbrook, Berkeley has 
created a truly unique place. 

Griffon Studios, SW11 
area: 1.6 acres 
Beds: 566 studios 
developed by: Berkeley first 

Delivered in partnership with Imperial College London, Berkeley First completed 
the first phase of 452 high quality postgraduate student studios at Griffon Studios 
in September 2011. With easy access to Imperial’s West London campuses, Griffon 
Studios provides individual studios with kitchens and en-suite shower rooms, and 
additional facilities include a central common room, gym, laundry, 24/7 reception 
and management suite. The remaining 114 studios are due for delivery to Imperial 
in September 2012. Berkeley First and Imperial’s joint interest in the completed 
scheme was sold in September 2012 to Legal and General, backed by a long 
lease from Imperial. 

Berkeley annual report 2012

 27 

Our BusinessOur Business 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
  
 
  
our lanD 
MaJor proJects 

there are seven maJor 
proJects Which, in aggregate, 
comprise approximately 
22% of the value of Berkeley’s 
current land Bank. 

These are projects in prominent locations in Central London, which have detailed 
planning consents and which are scheduled to commence completions over  
the next five years. 

The seven major projects are The Tower at St George Wharf in Vauxhall, 
Riverlight in Nine Elms, Chelsea Creek, One Tower Bridge, 375 Kensington  
High Street, Ebury Square in Belgravia and 190 Strand. The first completions  
at Chelsea Creek were reported in the year, and first completions on the other 
six schemes are anticipated over the course of the next five years. 

Both 375 Kensington High Street and 190 Strand are schemes owned, and being 
delivered by, St Edward, Berkeley’s joint venture with Prudential. 

The complex nature and size of these schemes means that it is inherently difficult 
to provide absolute certainty over the timing of delivery, which in some cases  
is up to five years away, as construction can frequently be affected by factors 
outside the direct control of management as well as the risk of any slowdown in 
sales. Whilst delivery will be phased over several years, these projects may lead 
to an uneven distribution of earnings and increased average selling price over 
the medium-term depending on the exact date of delivery. 

Riverlight, SW8 
area: 5 acres 
homes: c.750 
developed by: st. James 

Computer generated images are indicative only. 

28  Berkeley annual report 2012 

Our Business 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
our Business 

O
u
r
B
u
s
i
n
e
s
s

Berkeley annual report 2012

 29 

Our Business 
 
our lanD 
MaJor proJects 

Computer generated images are indicative only. 

Adjacent to Tower Bridge, the GLA headquarters and More London, and opposite 
the Tower of London, Berkeley’s development at One Tower Bridge comprises the 
regeneration of a redundant site and retention and refurbishment of listed school 
buildings on the site. Designed by Squire and Partners, and being delivered in 
partnership with the London Borough of Southwark, the scheme will complete the 
regeneration of More London, and provide a mix of residential, retail, convenience, 
leisure and cultural uses within a truly sustainable community. The first phase is now 
under construction. 

One Tower Bridge, SE1 
area: 3.75 acres 
homes: c.400 
developed by: Berkeley 

Xxxxxxxxxxxxx 

30  Berkeley annual report 2012 

Our Business 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Computer generated images are indicative only. 

A scheme located in the prime Central London neighbourhood of Belgravia, 
Ebury Square is the redevelopment of a vacant apartment building formerly 
owned by the Metropolitan Police. The architectural design reflects the high 
quality precedents of the surrounding Thomas Cubitt buildings in Belgravia.  
The quality of specification will match this, and will include basement car parking, 
a Health Suite, Business Centre, residents’ lounges, 24/7 concierge and security 
service. A planning consent was secured in early 2012, demolition of the  
existing buildings has since commenced. 

Ebury Square, Belgravia, SW1 
area: 1 acre 
homes: 71 
developed by: Berkeley 

The Tower, One St George Wharf, SW8 
area: 7.25 acres 
homes: c.1,400 
developed by: st george 

The Tower is the final phase of the 
20-year redevelopment of a redundant 
cold storage depot and coach park by 
Vauxhall Bridge. Designed by award-
winning architects Broadway Malyan, 
at 50 storeys it will be one of the tallest 
residential towers in Europe and will 
benefit from the vibrant mixed-use 
community already active at St George 
Wharf. It is also well connected with 
adjacent bus, underground and rail links 
across London. Erection of the frame is 
now nearing completion. 

Computer generated images are indicative only. 

Berkeley annual report 2012

 31 

Our BusinessOur Business 
  
  
  
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
our lanD 
scheMes in Delivery 

of Berkeley’s land Bank of 
101 sites, there Were 69 in 
production at 30 april 2012. 

During the course of the year, some 20 sites moved from land not under 
development into production, following successful planning consents and 
sales releases. 

Production levels are at their highest in London (40 of the 69 sites in production). 
Here, Berkeley’s investment in construction is concentrated on the seven  
major schemes separately identified above. There has also been significant 
investment in its major London regeneration schemes at Woodberry Park, 
Kidbrooke Village and Royal Arsenal Riverside, along with other schemes  
across Berkeley’s London portfolio. 

Outside London, where the remaining 29 of Berkeley’s sites in production are 
located and where the market relies more on traditional owner-occupiers who 
tend to purchase closer to completion, Berkeley has continued to invest in the 
right schemes, working carefully to try to match supply to demand and allocating 
capital as efficiently as possible. 

This year has also seen Berkeley invest in two significant heritage schemes, 
including the restoration of the Grade I Listed 18th Century Roehampton House 
in London and the Victorian period All Saints development in Eastbourne, both 
in partnership with English Heritage. The additional financial and operational 
investment in delivering such challenging schemes has again been carefully 
considered in light of Berkeley’s approach to limit the financial risk on these 
schemes and match supply to demand. 

Roehampton House at 
Queen Mary’s Place, Roehampton 
area: 13.8 acres 
homes: 447 
developed by: st James 

32  Berkeley annual report 2012 

Our Business 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
  
 
 
 
  
 
our Business 

O
u
r
B
u
s
i
n
e
s
s

Berkeley annual report 2012

 33
 

Our BusinessOur Business 
 
our lanD 
scheMes in Delivery 

All Saints, Eastbourne 
area: 6 acres 
homes: 104 
developed by: Berkeley 

34  Berkeley annual report 2012 

Berkeley’s painstaking refurbishment of this Victorian hospital in Eastbourne 
has restored the architectural detail of this building to its former glory, blending 
authentic period features with modern interiors. The latest phase of homes has 
been released and the external restoration, including landscaping across the 
6 acres of grounds, is complete. Berkeley has worked closely with English Heritage 
in delivering this project, to preserve the history and essence of the place. 

Our Business 
  
 
  
  
  
Roehampton House at 
Queen Mary’s Place, Roehampton 
area: 13.8 acres 
homes: 447 
developed by: st James 

Xxxxxxxxxxxxx 

The refurbishment of the ornate Grade 1 listed Roehampton House is the latest phase 
of St James’ development at Queen Mary’s Place in Roehampton. The renowned 
award-winning historic gardens, previously paved over to provide temporary parking 
for the prior occupants, are being restored together with stunning new landscaped 
areas. St James has worked closely with English Heritage throughout the restoration 
process, to provide wonderful living spaces within a truly historic building. These 
homes represent a landmark phase at Queen Mary’s Place. 

Woodberry Park, N4 
area: 60 acres 
homes: c.4,600 
developed by: Berkeley 

At Woodberry Park, Berkeley has 
taken forward placemaking in a way 
that combines social, economic and 
environmental sustainability 
considerations in pursuit of the ‘total 
living environment’ agreed with local 
residents, and has worked closely with 
key stakeholders to deliver a broad 
range of new community facilities, 
shops, open spaces, play facilities and 
transport facilities early to support the 
needs of existing and new residents. 
Occupations of the first phases have 
commenced, and Berkeley’s skill and 
expertise in identifying and delivering 
the right framework and approach to 
this major regeneration project will 
remain the key to its enduring success. 

Berkeley annual report 2012

 35 

Our BusinessOur Business  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
our Business 
new consents 

With all neW land acQuired, 
Berkeley’s initial focus 
is on securing a viaBle, 
implementaBle planning 
consent appropriate to  
the location, demand  
and context of each site. 

The Group has achieved some significant successes this year, and the quality  
of Berkeley’s land bank was enhanced over the year by the resolution to grant 
planning consent on 36 schemes. 

Of Berkeley’s Central London schemes, the new consents included 489 additional 
homes at Chelsea Creek, 275 homes at Abell and Cleland House in Westminster, 
some 200 apartments at 190 Strand and 90 apartments at Roman House. 

Across Greater London, consents were secured for some 750 new homes  
at Fulham Reach in Hammersmith, 144 homes at Thameside in Kew,  
some 150 apartments at Carnwath Road in Fulham, a housing and apartment 
scheme in Wimbledon and an apartment scheme in Finchley. This is in addition 
to consents on the next phases at Berkeley’s large-scale regeneration schemes  
at Kidbrooke Village, Royal Arsenal Riverside and Woodberry Park. 

Outside London, nine new consents were secured, including amongst others 
a new housing scheme in Caterham and a selection of the Group’s boutique 
schemes of less than ten homes. 

At 30 April 2012, 84% of the sites in Berkeley’s land bank benefited from an 
implementable planning consent (2011: 77%), a statistic which gives strong 
visibility over the future viability of the land bank. 

The improvement of any scheme, whether through an initial consent or 
an optimised consent, is reliant on swift, helpful and proactive engagement 
from all parties involved in the planning process. Berkeley’s approach is 
characterised by a spirit of engagement and dialogue with local communities 
and stakeholders impacted by its schemes, an approach which it believes is 
the most effective to unlocking each of its sites, and the key to ensuring the 
delivery of new housing in England. 

Wimbledon Hill Park, SW20 
area: 5.7 acres 
homes: c.80 
delivered by: Berkeley 

Computer generated images are indicative only. 

36  Berkeley annual report 2012 

Our Business  
 
  
 
  
  
 
  
  
  
 
 
 
 
our Business 

O
u
r
B
u
s
i
n
e
s
s

Berkeley annual report 2012

 37
 

Our BusinessOur Business 
 
our Business 
new consents 

Roman House, City of London 
area: 0.3 acres 
homes: 90 
delivered by: Berkeley 

A consent was secured by Berkeley to refurbish this existing office block in the 
City of London close to the Barbican, to provide 90 luxury apartments in the heart 
of London’s financial district. The new consent retains the Portland stone façade of 
the current building, and the interiors, designed by The Manser Practice, have been 
inspired by the original piece of Roman Wall adjacent to the development. 

38  Berkeley annual report 2012 

Computer generated images are indicative only. 

Our Business 
  
  
 
 
 
Fulham Reach, W6 
area: 7.4 acres 
homes: 744 
delivered by: st george 

St George commenced construction during the year on the first phase of this 
scheme on the River Thames close to Hammersmith. Having secured a consent for 
some 744 new homes, based on designs by John Thompson & Partners, St George’s 
plans in the first phase include a mix of Manhattan, one, two and three bedroom 
apartments along with a spa, gymnasium, concierge, snooker room and private 
cinema room for the use of residents, and have already refurbished and opened 
the riverfront walkway. 

Abell and Cleland House, SW1 
area: 1.7 acres 
homes: 275 
delivered by: Berkeley 

In the heart of Westminster, Berkeley 
recently secured a planning consent 
for the redevelopment of these former 
government office buildings into a 
residential scheme. Providing 275 new 
homes, the scheme will provide a high 
quality environment not just for the 
scheme’s residents, but with sensitive, 
contemporary architectural and 
landscape design, will represent a 
significant improvement for all of the 
local community. Berkeley secured a 
planning consent in early 2012, and 
the existing buildings are currently 
being readied for demolition. 

Computer generated images are indicative only. 

Berkeley annual report 2012

 39 

Our BusinessOur Business 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
 
our Business 
new acquisitions 

the priority for a successful 
and sustainaBle development 
Business is to Buy land Well, 
and Berkeley has a strong 
track record in this area. 

At Berkeley, land opportunities are assessed with a rigour that relies on the 
expertise and application of trusted land teams, as well as their understanding 
of and support for Berkeley’s long-term vision. The commercial viability, above  
all the demand assessment, and investment returns of each scheme are crucial; 
but it is the vision for each scheme, tied in with the aspirations of the local 
community and of local government, the quality of the place that we can create, 
and Berkeley’s willingness to interact with stakeholders along the way, which  
are the key to adding value throughout the development process. 

This year, Berkeley secured 2,444 plots across 20 new sites, investing a further 
£311 million, which equates to an average plot cost of £127,000. The average plot 
cost reflects a concentration of land acquired in London, in line with the Group’s 
strategy to invest in markets in which it has a competitive advantage and where 
the planning, political and market environment supports investment. 

In Central London, the sites included a commercial property in EC1, which is 
currently tenanted until 2015 and has a planning consent for some 700 homes, 
two schemes on the Albert Embankment (Eastbury House and Hampton House) 
and a scheme at One Blackfriars which has an established consent for a 
52-storey development. 

In Greater London the sites included a former monastery in Finchley and a Royal 
Mail sorting office in Twickenham amongst others. 

Outside London, Berkeley has acquired a former hospital site in Tunbridge Wells, 
a housing scheme in Caterham, and a selection of boutique housing schemes each 
with fewer than 10 homes. Most of the sites were either acquired with a planning 
consent or conditional on a planning consent being secured. 

Berkeley’s land holdings at 30 April 2012 do not include the acquisition of Wapping 
Village on which terms were agreed and the purchase completed in May 2012. 

Berkeley prides itself on its track record of acquiring the right land selectively 
and at the right point in the cycle, and with the acquisition of Wapping, has now 
invested over £1 billion in new land since the Group repositioned its strategy in 
February 2009 to invest in land. 

City Forum, EC1V 
area: 4.7 acres 
delivered by: Berkeley 

Computer generated images are indicative only. 

40  Berkeley annual report 2012 

Our Business 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
our Business 

O
u
r
B
u
s
i
n
e
s
s

Berkeley annual report 2012

 41
 

Our BusinessOur Business 
 
our Business 
new acquisitions 

HAMPTON HOUSE 

EASTBURY HOUSE 

Computer generated images are indicative only. 

Eastbury House and Hampton House, on the Albert Embankment in Vauxhall and 
overlooking the River Thames, were acquired during the year. An application for 
a new 28 storey development, designed by Rogers Stirk Harbour + Partners, has 
been submitted on Eastbury House, whilst Hampton House was acquired with  
an existing consent for 242 homes, a 167 bedroom hotel and approximately 
5,000 sq ft of commercial space. 

Eastbury House and Hampton House, Vauxhall 
area: 1.2 acres 
delivered by: st James 

Xxxxxxxxxxxxx 

42  Berkeley annual report 2012 

Our Business 
Royal Tunbridge Wells 
area: 11.6 acres 
delivered by: Berkeley 

A housing scheme in Royal Tunbridge Wells in Kent, this was the acquisition of the 
former Kent and Sussex Hospital, in an area where Berkeley believes that there is 
good infrastructure and there will be strong demand. Berkeley is working on an 
application to demolish the existing redundant buildings and deliver a new housing 
scheme appropriate to the market in this location. 

ONE BLACKFRIARS 

One Blackfriars, SE1 
area: 1.6 acres 
delivered by: st george 

Acquired in December 2011, One 
Blackfriars is a 1.6 acre cleared site to the 
south of the River Thames in Blackfriars. 
The site was purchased with an existing 
consent for a combination of residential, 
hotel and commercial uses within a 
50-storey tower. Since the year end, and 
having reviewed the existing consent, 
St George has submitted an application 
to revise this consent. 

Computer generated images are indicative only. 

Berkeley annual report 2012

 43 

Our BusinessOur Business 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
running a sustainable Business 

running a  
sustainaBle Business 
our vision is to 
remain one of the 
most successful 
and sustainaBle 
Businesses in Britain. 

44  Berkeley annual report 2012 

 
Running a Sustainable Business 

R
u
n
n
n
g
a

i

i

l

s
u
s
t
a
n
a
b
e
B
u
s
i
n
e
s
s

Berkeley annual report 2012

 45
 

 
 
 
 
running a sustainable Business 

Berkeley is passionate about 
quality-led placemaking. 

From one of the UK’s largest 
regeneration projects, to a high 
profile civil engineering scheme, 
to an 84 acre country park. 

1 Kidbrooke Village 

putting a ‘village’ back 
into london and bringing 
a renewed social and 
community vibrancy into 
everyday lives to enhance 
the wider area. 

2 Crossrail at Woolwich 

Berkeley is delivering and 
co-funding the crossrail 
station box at Woolwich as 
part of their regeneration 
of royal arsenal riverside. 

3 Edenbrook Country Park 
encompassing 84 acres 
of meadowlands, wetlands 
and woodland areas, the 
country park is connected 
via a network of footpaths 
and cycleways. 

1 

Before – ferrier estate 

during – demolition 

after – phase 1 

46  Berkeley annual report 2012 

 
 
  
  
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
  
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
  
  
 
2 

3 

running a sustainable Business 

Computer generated images are indicative only. 

R
u
n
n
n
g
a

i

i

l

s
u
s
t
a
n
a
b
e
B
u
s
i
n
e
s
s

Berkeley annual report 2012

 47
 

 
 
 
 
running a sustainaBle Business
 

Berkeley’s oBJectives and 
strategy have a clear focus 
on the long-term. 

We believe that a business in this sector cannot and should not operate with  
only short-term targets, and that a sound understanding of the long-term cyclical 
nature of the market in which we operate must be reflected in our approach. 

Our targets to return £13 per share in cash to shareholders by 2021 and to  
retain a strong sustainable business throughout this period and thereafter is  
a clear statement of long-term intent, and requires us to run our business in  
a sustainable and safe way. We manage the business on a day-to-day basis with 
these long-term objectives in mind, and with a series of specific commitments 
under the framework of Vision2020, which embed this approach within our 
operating teams. We track and measure our performance towards the long-term 
objectives through review of our financial performance and progress, and against 
our commitments under each key area of Vision2020, which overall comprise  
our key performance indicators. Our long-term financial strategy, in combination 
with the fundamental principles of Vision2020, and the importance of recruiting 
and retaining the best people to run the business sustainably and with integrity, 
support Berkeley in its drive to be one of the most successful and sustainable 
businesses in Britain. 

Our vision 
for the future 

vision2020 provides Berkeley with the framework to meet this 
ambition and focuses the business on four key impact areas: 

the customer experience 

Building greener homes 

delivering sustainable communities 

running a sustainable Business 

48  Berkeley annual report 2012 

Running a Sustainable Business 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
   
 
   
 
financial staBility 

an assessment of financial performance and outlook is central to the annual 
Report of every business, and this is no different for Berkeley. The Trading 
and Financial Reviews elsewhere in this report provide a detailed analysis 
of our performance in the year. This performance is underpinned by our 
trading success, under which we have delivered Profit Before Tax of 
£214.8 million (2011: £136.2 million) and an Operating Margin before 
exceptional items of 18.8% (2011: 18.3%). However it is a Return of equity 
of 21.2% (2011: 15.3%), one of our core performance targets, which best 
measures our performance towards delivering sustainable success. 

A return on equity at this level is central to our assertion that the Berkeley Group 
business is being run at an optimal size which enables it to deliver exceptional 
returns in an efficient way. 

Careful control of the balance sheet is at the root of Berkeley’s ability to deliver 
such returns. Despite a growth in capital employed from £891.7 million at 
30 April 2011 to £1,157.7 million at 30 April 2012, we have carefully controlled 
gearing levels at 5% from net debt of £57.9 million (2011: nil from net cash of 
£42.0 million), reflecting our planned investment in high quality land assets and 
in a demand-led investment in construction as we entered this phase of the 
cycle. This investment in construction is supported by our strong forward sales 
position which at £1,055.7 million (2011: £813.5 million) is at a level which gives 
us the confidence to commit investment in construction to the sites to which 
the sales relate. This balance sheet strength is reflected in Net Asset Value per  
Share of 839.3 pence, up from 709.2 pence in 2011. 

We have continued to invest in land in a controlled way, and have invested 
£311 million over the course of the year. Together with our focus on securing the 
right planning consents for our schemes, we have increased Gross Margin in the 
land bank from £2,304 million at 30 April 2011 to £2,580 million at 30 April 2012, 
our second core performance target. Where we invest in land is where we have 
confidence in the fundamentals of that land in terms of location, planning and 
demand. Once secured, land is the asset which fundamentally supports the 
long-term earning potential of the business. 

It is the combination of solid trading performance, balance sheet strength  
and land bank potential which, together with the right approach to running  
a business for the long-term, gives us the confidence in Berkeley’s ability to 
continue to perform at this level in the long-term. 

£214.8 
million 

(2011: £136.2 million) 
profit Before tax 

21.2% 

(2011: 15.3%) 
return on equity 

18.8% 

(2011: 18.3%) 
operating Margin  
before exceptional items 

£1,055.7

million
 

(2011: £813.5 million) 
Forward sales 

£2,580  

million
 

(2011: £2,304 million) 
land Bank 

Berkeley annual report 2012

 49 

Running a Sustainable BusinessRunning a Sustainable Business 
 
  
 
  
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
  
 
 
  
 
 
 
  
 
running a sustainable Business 

the customer experience 

the customer at the  
heart of our Business 

The customer is at the heart of every decision that we make, 
from the land that we buy, through development planning, to  
the detailed design, specification and construction of our housing 
and commercial space. Our vision for 2020 is that: 

“We will consistently meet or exceed our customers’ expectations 
by delivering well-designed, beautiful homes and communities 
where they can live happy, healthy and environmentally-efficient 
lifestyles. The service that we provide to our customers 
throughout the purchasing process and after completion will 
be exceptional. Customers will be positioned at the heart of our 
business and will be central to the decisions that we make.” 

Our vision
 
for the future
 

97% 

(2011: 96%) 
Percentage of customers 
that would “Recommend 
us to a friend” 

53% 

(2011: 45%) 
Percentage of commercial space 
completed which achieved 
BREEAM Very Good 

50  Berkeley annual report 2012 

Running a Sustainable Business  
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
running a sustainable Business

Edenbrook, Hampshire 

Our customers include private purchasers, housing associations, universities, 
student and Extra Care accommodation providers, commercial occupiers, hotel 
operators and investors. We take our relationships with all our customers very 
seriously, and challenge ourselves to meet or exceed their expectations in 
everything we do. 

We use customer satisfaction surveys undertaken by an independent external 
agency to measure how well we are meeting our customers’ expectations. All of 
our private purchasers are asked to complete a survey, and this year 97% of our 
customers reported that they would recommend Berkeley to a friend, compared 
to 96% in 2010/11. This is above our target of 90%, and represents further 
reassurance that, through Vision2020, we are succeeding in embedding the 
customer experience at the heart of our business. 

Whilst we are primarily a residential developer, we also target high performance 
standards on our commercial space on mixed-use developments and on our 
student accommodation schemes. Our objective is to ensure that all commercial 
space (including student accommodation) achieves BREEAM Very Good, or is 
capable of achieving this if fitout is to be undertaken by the tenant. BREEAM 
is an assessment which measures the environmental impact of the buildings that 
we develop. During 2011/12, 100% of our commercial space submitted for 
planning will meet these requirements and 53% of our completed commercial 
space was certified to BREEAM Very Good. 

The Customer Experience is central to Berkeley’s reputation, its ability to secure 
sales and hence the viability of the future business. As such, it is a central focus 
of management at all levels, and one in which we will continue to strive for 
exceptional performance. 

Driving perForMance through vision2020  
(our leaDing coMMitMents up to 2014) 

Over the last two years the commitments we have made in this area through 
Vision2020 have concentrated on embedding the customer experience at 
the heart of our business. We are now setting ourselves targets that will 
deliver exceptional customer service on a par with the best performing 
companies in Britain. 

From now on, we are moving our “Recommend us to a friend” target up to 95%. 

We will also: 

–  Provide every customer with a Customer Satisfaction Commitment. This is our 
way of making sure our customers are completely satisfied with their purchase. 

–  Provide our customers with a dedicated point of contact at every stage of the 
customer journey. We believe customers should have individually tailored 
support to guide them through the purchasing process. 

We take our relationships with all our
customers very seriously, and challenge
ourselves to meet or exceed their 
expectations in everything we do. 

Berkeley annual report 2012

 51 

Running a Sustainable BusinessRunning a Sustainable Business 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
  
 
   
   
 
 
running a sustainable Business 

Building greener homes 

environmental 
sustainaBility 

It is a reality of the world today that environmental sustainability 
must be at the heart of any business that wishes to be successful. 
Berkeley prides itself on having led the way in its commitments 
to achieving environmental performance standards across its 
portfolio, and believes that this is the right and responsible 
approach to take in this industry. Our vision for 2020 is that: 

“We will have completed our first zero carbon community and all 
our new developments will be low or zero carbon. Our proven track 
record of delivering high quality, well-designed, comfortable homes 
with low environmental impact will make them highly desirable to 
customers and will have expanded our market base. Homes built 
by Berkeley will be recognised throughout the industry as the very 
best examples of sustainable design and construction.” 

Our vision
 
for the future
 

81% 

(2011: 65%) 
percentage of homes certified 
using an environmental 
performance methodology 

89% 

(2011: 92%) 
percentage of development 
on brownfield land 

52  Berkeley annual report 2012 

 
  
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
  
  
Holborough Lakes, Kent 

Our continued focus is on developing
on brownfield land, with 89% of our 
development this year on brownfield
rather than greenfield land. 

The homes we build have an environmental impact not only during the 
construction process, but also through their occupation. Designing homes to 
meet environmental performance standards such as the Code for Sustainable 
Homes helps minimise these impacts whilst giving us the ability to clearly 
demonstrate their performance to our customers and other stakeholders. We  
are also committed to integrating additional measures to reduce impact where 
we believe that these add value or meet the demands of our stakeholders. 

Our industry-leading commitment to certify all homes to Level 3 of the Code 
for Sustainable Homes has been the driving force behind our achievement of 
81% of homes built this year certified using an environmental performance 
methodology (2011: 65%). We continue to investigate the feasibility of improving 
environmental performance standards still further, and are pleased to confirm 
that this year we will be designing several schemes to Level 4 of the Code for 
Sustainable Homes. Delivering energy-efficient homes and improving water 
efficiency is not only right for the environment, it is immediately reflected in 
reduced utility bills for our customers. 

Our continued focus is on developing on brownfield land, with 89% of our 
development this year on brownfield rather than greenfield land (2011: 92%), 
thereby bringing back to life often redundant or under-utilised land. The ecological 
impact of our work has included the introduction of brown roofs, country parks, 
and waterfront walks at certain of our schemes, providing a sensitive balance in 
the places that we deliver. 

As the wider movement is towards prioritising the environmental agenda, Berkeley 
will continue to remain at the forefront in promoting this agenda, its importance 
both internally and externally reflecting its rightful place at the heart of Berkeley’s 
strategy to build and consolidate its business for the long-term. 

Driving perForMance through vision2020  
(our leaDing coMMitMents up to 2014) 

In recent years our focus has been on reducing carbon emissions from the homes 
we build. To address this, in 2007 we launched a Climate Change Policy which 
committed all of our new homes to Level 3 of the Code for Sustainable Homes. 

Climate change would pose risks to the built environment, primarily from higher 
temperatures and changed rainfall patterns. In this context, our next challenge is 
to make sure our homes provide high levels of comfort and simplicity and sit within 
a landscape that can cope with more extreme weather conditions. From now on, 
Berkeley will ensure our homes are not only low carbon – every place we create 
will also be designed for adaptation to a future changed climate. 

We will also: 

–	 Put in place adaptation measures on all new developments by investing in the 

space between buildings to create beautiful landscapes which help places adapt 
to climate change. 

–  Harvest rainwater for use on all new developments. 

–  Provide ‘living roofs’ on every suitable apartment roof space. 

Berkeley annual report 2012

 53 

Running a Sustainable BusinessRunning a Sustainable Business  
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
   
   
  
 
 
running a sustainable Business 

Computer generated images are indicative only. 

delivering sustainaBle communities 

creating places that Will 
stand the test of time 

Berkeley has an emphasis on creating a successful, sustainable
 
place from every site that we develop. Our vision for 2020 is that:
 

“We will create high quality, sustainable places where people 
choose to live, work and spend their time. These will be places 
that directly encourage the well-being of residents and offer them 
a space and a base from which to lead safe and fulfilling lives.  
Our ability to transform sites into thriving communities will be 
considered the best in our industry. Through our ability both  
to engage and to deliver, Berkeley will be the developer of  
choice for local authorities and existing communities.” 

For each of our schemes, we develop a specific solution, using bespoke design, 
with the aim of delivering well-designed homes and communities. We do not have 
standard product. Unlike most major housebuilders, we consistently use qualified 
architects to design each scheme, whether it consists of 4 or 4,000 homes. 

Our vision 
for the future 

44% 

(2011: 29%) 

percentage of homes 
completed which met the 
lifetime homes standard 

14 

(2011: 30) 
number of new developments 
achieving 14 or more of the 
Building for life criteria 

54  Berkeley annual report 2012 

Running a Sustainable Business 
  
  
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
  
running a sustainable Business

Chelsea Creek, SW6 

Each place we create emerges through the management of a complex series 
of relationships and processes. Together these deliver the right mix of housing, 
transport, open space, retail and other facilities. We work very closely with the 
community to achieve this; their needs and ideas inform the design. Ultimately, 
they must take pride in the place and responsibility for its long-term success. 
We have a culture in our business of talking directly to residents and delivering 
what we promise. 

Our strategy puts equal emphasis on each dimension of sustainability. This 
means building a place which offers people access to employment and a  
good quality of life, as well as the chance to live in a low carbon environment.  
Berkeley invests in the social fabric of each community just as we invest in the 
environmental performance of each home. Our ability to deliver this integrated 
approach to making a place sustainable is a core part of what makes us different. 

Our developments also have an important role to play in contributing to economic 
growth and prosperity in the local community, at first through the investment 
in construction and infrastructure during the delivery process, where we actively 
work to promote job opportunities, and on the occupied scheme. Many of our 
developments are a draw to new business, including the opportunities presented 
by the new retail and commercial space that we deliver, and so help boost the 
wider employment opportunities in the locations in which we operate. 

When Vision2020 was launched in May 2010, we committed to assessing our 
new developments using the Building for Life criteria and ensuring that they 
achieve at least the Silver Standard (equivalent to scoring 14 out of the 20 
criteria). Building for Life is a framework to encourage well-designed homes and 
neighbourhoods, and is a measure that we use to demonstrate design quality in 
the communities that we create. In 2012, we assessed 14 of our developments 
using the criteria and 100% achieved a score of 14 or more. Since making this 
commitment in May 2010, a total of 44 new developments have now been 
assessed and scored 14 or more. 

We have also committed to apply the Lifetime Homes principles on all new 
developments. Lifetime Homes are designed to be adaptable to people’s changing 
needs over their lifetime, thus preventing social exclusion, and so success under 
this standard is indicative of the level of inclusivity of our developments. In 2012, 
44% of our homes met the Lifetime Homes Standard (2011: 29%). 

Our focus is on delivering well-designed, safe, sustainable places which will 
endure as settled, vibrant communities long into the future. At Berkeley, we 
believe that it is this long-term vision, to appreciate the needs of our customers 
and wider stakeholders before, during and after the delivery of our schemes, that 
is the right model for a truly successful and sustainable business in our sector. 

Driving perForMance through vision2020  
(our leaDing coMMitMents up to 2014) 

Well-designed buildings and places are crucial in delivering sustainable 
communities. This is why in May 2010 we made a commitment that all of our 
new developments would achieve the Building for Life Silver Standard. 

We also know that if you want a place to thrive, it is not enough just to provide 
good physical infrastructure. You also need to focus on how people will relate to 
each other and function as a community. We use the idea of social sustainability 
to describe this. It captures the way in which a neighbourhood supports the 
individual and collective well-being of the people who live there. We will now 
develop a coherent way of routinely addressing the issues on our developments 
that affect people’s well-being and quality of life. 

We will also: 

–	 Establish an understanding in our business and in government of what social 

sustainability is, how you measure it and what you can do to support it. 

We have a culture 
in our business 
of talking directly  
to residents and 
delivering what  
we promise. 

Berkeley annual report 2012

 55 

Running a Sustainable BusinessRunning a Sustainable Business  
 
 
 
  
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
    
 
 
 
Running a Sustainable Business 

running a sustainaBle Business 

managing the economic, 
social and environmental 
impacts of our Business 

Vision2020 is about how we run the business from day-to-day, to 
take on board the principles of a long-term strategy, in a safe and 
sustainable way. Our vision for 2020 is that: 

“Sustainability will be fully integrated into our business strategy 
and operations. Our environmental impact will be as low as 
possible and our operational sites will be healthy and safe places 
to work. We will retain a highly skilled and passionate workforce 
and through the Berkeley Foundation we will have given help  
to many young people, their families and communities. We will 
maximise shareholder value over the long-term in a sustainable 
and safe way, for an acceptable level of risk.” 

Our vision
 
for the future
 

2.69 

(2011: 3.63) 
riDDor accident incident rate 

1.53 
tonnes CO2e 

(2011: 1.67 tonnes c02e)* 
total direct operational carbon 
emissions per operative on site 

*restated figure 

56  Berkeley annual report 2012 

Running a Sustainable Business 
 
  
 
 
  
Running a Sustainable Business

Good Work Contractor Conference 
organised by Berkeley 

We have reported on our financial performance, and how this demonstrates our 
approach to building a sustainable business both in terms of past performance 
and indicators for the future. Operationally, we prioritise those areas which enable 
us to manage the economic, social and environmental impacts of the business in a 
way that promotes the Berkeley way as the right way to do business in this sector. 

Health and Safety is an absolute priority. As production levels have increased 
over recent years, it gives us confidence in our approach to report that the 
RIDDOR accident incident rate (an indicator that measures the number of fatalities, 
major incidents and over three day absences per 1,000 people working on our 
construction sites) has reduced to 2.69 (2011: 3.63), a level which continues to 
outperform the industry. This is an area that requires continued vigilance and hard 
work from our teams, and receives a high level of management focus. We have 
continued our Good Order and Good Work programmes across all of our sites 
to continue to drive high Health and Safety standards on our sites, and this has 
again been well received by our contractors, managers and operatives. Berkeley’s 
stakeholders, and above all Berkeley’s workforce, should take comfort that 
Berkeley will always keep Health and Safety a top priority. 

Environmental efficiency in our operations is an environmental focus which also 
has a clear cost benefit. Our focus on reducing emissions has meant that our direct 
operational carbon emissions per operative on site has reduced by 9% in 2012 
to 1.53 tonnes CO2e. We continue to focus on ways to further reduce our carbon 
emissions and our water consumption and waste generation during the 
construction process. 

Driving perForMance through vision2020  
(our leaDing coMMitMents up to 2014) 

In the last two years we have had a particular focus on managing the social and
 
economic impacts of our business through the launch of the Berkeley Foundation.
 
We also set targets to reduce the environmental impacts of our business and
 
enhance Health and Safety performance.
 

Strong financial performance is essential for running a sustainable business.
 
This provides the foundation from which we can deliver all of our Vision2020
 
commitments. Our key focus moving forward will be to maximise shareholder value
 
over the long-term in a safe and sustainable way, for an acceptable level of risk.
 

To achieve this, we will also:
 

–	 Position the business so that Berkeley is well-placed to deliver returns 

of £4.34 per share to shareholders by September 2015. 

–  Retain our balance sheet strength and continue investment in our land bank. 

This approach will give us the financial and operational stability to properly 
manage the social, economic and environmental impacts of our business across 
all disciplines as we have done in the past, enabling us to keep Health and Safety 
a top priority and continue to improve our environmental efficiency. 

We continue to focus on ways to further
reduce our carbon emissions and our 
water consumption and waste generation
during the construction process. 

Berkeley annual report 2012

 57 

Running a Sustainable BusinessRunning a Sustainable Business 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
 
 
  
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
    
  
   
 
  
  
 
 
  
58  Berkeley annual report 2012 

Running a Sustainable BusinessR
u
n
n
n
g
a

i

i

l

s
u
s
t
a
n
a
b
e
B
u
s
i
n
e
s
s

Berkeley annual report 2012
Berkeley annual report 2012

 59
 59 

Running a Sustainable Business 
 
 
 
Street Elite 
a sports-based training for work programme 

Conor McGahon, Land Manager, Berkeley 
at the summit of mount everest helping 
raise money for the Berkeley foundation 

60  Berkeley annual report 2012 

the Berkeley foundation 

The Berkeley Foundation was launched in 2011. It works to improve the lives of 
young people and their communities in London and the South East. 

The Berkeley Foundation embodies our approach to Corporate Social Responsibility, 
and has engaged our employees both within the wider community and beyond. 

The Foundation invests in three different ways: through a small group of major 
strategic partnerships; by supporting individual charities which matter to our 
local businesses; and by making one-off grants. Two strategic partnerships began 
in 2011. The first was with the Lord’s Taverners, developing a sports-based 
training for a work programme called Street Elite. The second was with Shelter, 
supporting a complete range of housing advice services for young people. 

The creation of apprenticeships across our developments, of which there have 
been some 100 to date, is also in line with Berkeley’s aspiration to embed good 
corporate citizenship into the business model itself, recognising the capacity that 
a business with the skills and experience of the Berkeley workforce can give back 
in training a highly skilled workforce for the future. 

Berkeley’s intention is to make the Berkeley Foundation the most effective and 
distinctive Corporate Social Responsibility programme in the housebuilding and 
real estate sector. This will be built on a strategic approach to modelling new 
ways of changing young people’s lives for the better, supported by the notion 
that everyone in Berkeley, however they may choose to do it, does something  
to support the Foundation every year. 

Running a Sustainable Business 
 
 
 
our people 

The success of Berkeley as an organisation to date is a testament to the 
knowledge, skill and hard work of our employees across every discipline of the 
business. Implementing a long-term strategy needs the understanding, buy-in 
and above all the passion of all of our employees to ensure that we deliver a 
business that can be considered one of the best and most sustainable in Britain, 
one of which all of our employees can be proud. Recruitment and retention of 
our high calibre workforce is crucial to this, to ensure that Berkeley can remain  
a market leader and implement Vision2020 across every discipline. 

aWards 

Whilst the business is not run in order to secure awards, perhaps that which 
makes Berkeley most proud, of those received this year, is its recognition by 
Management Today as Britain’s Most Admired Company in 2011, ranking ahead 
of some of Britain’s most prestigious businesses from Diageo to Royal Dutch 
Shell and Unilever. Other awards this year include 12 What House? Awards, 
Homebuilder of the Year at the Daily Telegraph British Homes Awards and 
Housebuilder of the Year at the 2011 Building Awards amongst others. The  
focus that Berkeley places on Health and Safety has also again been recognised 
through awards across its schemes from RoSPA, the NHBC and the Considerate 
Constructors Scheme. 

Awards of this nature support our assertion that Berkeley is on the right path.  
We have again delivered a strong operating performance, whilst demonstrating 
that we are running the business in the right way to build and consolidate 
Berkeley as one of Britain’s leading businesses now and in the future. With the 
right long-term strategy, the right operational targets, and the right framework  
in Vision2020 to support our approach, we believe that Berkeley is entering the 
year in excellent shape to continue to deliver on its promises. 

Our Sustainability Report 2012, published under separate cover, provides a more 
in-depth analysis of Berkeley’s approach to running a sustainable business under 
the framework of Vision2020. 

Berkeley’s intention is to make the Berkeley Foundation the 
most effective and distinctive Corporate Social Responsibility 
programme in the housebuilding and real estate sector. 

Berkeley annual report 2012

 61 

Running a Sustainable BusinessRunning a Sustainable Businesstrading & Financial review 

trading & financial revieW 
the Berkeley vision is to 
maximise shareholder 
value over the long-term 
in a sustainaBle and safe 
Way, returning £13 per share 
to shareholders By 2021. 

62  Berkeley annual report 2012 

 
 
 
  
  
 
 
trading & Financial review 

i

T
r
a
d
n
g
&
F
n
a
n
c
i
a

i

l

R
e
v
i
e
w

Berkeley annual report 2012

 63
 

 
 
 
 
traDing review 

Stanmore Place, HA7 
area: 7 acres 
homes: 798 
developed by: st edward 

trading performance 

Berkeley’s results for the year ended 30 April 2012 demonstrate a strong 
underlying operating performance which, along with further growth in  
forward sales, a strong balance sheet and a solid land bank, leaves Berkeley 
well-positioned to meet its previous target of doubling its profit before tax  
from £110 million to £220 million by 30 April 2013, some two years earlier  
than originally planned and to embrace its new operational targets as it  
heads towards the first targeted dividend repayment in September 2015. 

The strong underlying operating performance has been balanced with controlled 
investment in the future of the business. Shareholder equity has increased  
by £170.4 million to £1,099.8 million, while capital employed increased by  
£266.0 million to £1,157.7 million, some 29.8% higher than at the start of the year. 

A full review of Berkeley’s trading performance and financial position is set out  
in the Financial Review on pages 74 to 79. 

housing market 

Demand for residential property in good locations in London and the South East 
remained strong throughout the year, attracting interest from both UK domestic 
and international buyers, whether investors or owner-occupiers. This is consistent 
with recent data from the Office of National Statistics which recorded that prices in 
London rose by 4.9% in the year to April 2012 compared to 2.1% in the South East 
and 1.4% nationally in the same period. 

This demand undoubtedly rests on London’s pre-eminent position as one of the 
world’s largest trading and financial centres and the benefits that this brings to the 
wider economy in the South East of England in terms of jobs and employment. 
Underlying domestic demand has remained resilient during the year, with visitor 
numbers across our sites remaining stable compared to last year, as has the 
ongoing demand for rental properties on our developments. For Berkeley’s 
international customers, London continues to offer a unique combination of 
stability, access to some of the world’s most prestigious addresses, including 
shops, restaurants and cultural amenities, a number of world-class higher 
education establishments and a competitive exchange rate. Together with what 
has historically been a supportive taxation framework, these have made London 
the preferred choice, when compared to the world’s other major cities, for major 
inward investment. 

Outside London, where the market relies more on traditional owner-occupiers, 
forward selling is less prevalent as people tend to buy when product is completed 
and available for occupation. Sales levels have been consistent with last year and 
Berkeley has worked carefully to try to match supply to demand. Berkeley held 
288 completed properties in stock at 30 April 2012 (30 April 2011: 238) which 
are available for immediate sale and which is in line with historic levels. 

Compounding this demand, there is a shortage of supply of new homes, 
exacerbated by existing planning policy and restrictions on the availability of 
development finance, which continues to place a scarcity value on homes in 
good locations. In these conditions, Berkeley anticipates that demand will 
remain strong for property in the best locations in London and the South East. 

These market conditions are reflected in Berkeley’s sales reservations which  
were some 27% ahead of last year, supported by the launch of 23 new sites to 
the market. Cash due on forward sales stood at £1,055.7 million at 30 April 2012, 
an increase of 29.8% from £813.5 million at 30 April 2011. Cancellation rates 
which averaged 14.8% over the course of the year remained at levels consistent 
with a strong underlying market. 

64  Berkeley annual report 2012 

Trading & Financial Review 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
  
 
 
trading & Financial review 

i

T
r
a
d
n
g
&
F
n
a
n
c
i
a

i

l

R
e
v
i
e
w

Berkeley annual report 2012

 65
 

Trading & Financial ReviewTrading & Financial Review 
 
 
 
2,444
 

plots acquired 

20 

new sites 

Government intervention to provide a solution to customer deposits and higher 
loan-to-value mortgages through the NewBuy scheme has been welcome.  
Whilst not necessarily expected to form a significant proportion of Berkeley 
sales, NewBuy is available on properties for sale under £500,000 and is a helpful 
enabler for those looking to step onto the housing ladder without access to a 
significant deposit. 

The NewBuy scheme is expected to offer a more permanent replacement to  
the existing FirstBuy scheme when it comes to an end in December 2012. Under 
the government’s FirstBuy initiative, some 60 customers have been helped to 
purchase their own Berkeley home during the year. Finding ways to continue  
to help individuals secure financing is important to ensure momentum and 
confidence in the housebuilding sector. 

Across other areas of Berkeley’s portfolio, there has remained strong interest  
in student accommodation, with a postgraduate scheme at Clapham Junction 
delivered during the year and four undergraduate schemes in the pipeline, 
underpinned by University and student demand in the locations identified. 
This is very much demand led, and the attraction of students to the world-class 
universities of London and the South East, who in turn demand world-class 
accommodation, has supported this investment. 

Despite the well-documented challenges in retailing in uncertain times, there 
continues to be good interest in commercial tenancies on Berkeley’s mixed-use 
schemes, with nine major supermarket pre-lets secured over the last eighteen 
months and tenancies across other uses including restaurants, coffee shops and 
crèches amongst others supporting the vibrancy of the places created. 

neW land acQuisition 

In the year, Berkeley secured 2,444 plots across 20 new sites, investing a further 
£311 million, which equates to an average plot cost of £127,000. The average 
plot cost reflects a concentration of land acquired in London, in line with the 
Group’s strategy to invest in markets in which it has a competitive advantage  
and where the planning, political and market environment supports investment. 

In Central London, the sites include a commercial property in EC1 which is 
currently tenanted until 2015 and has a planning consent for some 700 homes, 
two schemes on the Albert Embankment (Eastbury House and Hampton House) 
and a scheme at One Blackfriars which has an established consent for a 52-storey 
development. In Greater London they include a former monastery in Finchley 
and a Royal Mail sorting office in Twickenham. Outside London Berkeley has 
acquired a former hospital site in Tunbridge Wells, a housing scheme in 
Caterham, and a selection of boutique housing schemes each with fewer than 
10 plots. Most of the sites were either acquired with a planning consent or 
conditional on a planning consent being secured. Berkeley’s land holdings  
at 30 April 2012 do not include the acquisition of Wapping Village on which 
terms were agreed and the purchase completed in May 2012. 

In the year Berkeley secured 2,444 plots across 20 new
sites, investing a further £311 million, which equates
to an average plot cost of £127,000. 

66  Berkeley annual report 2012 

Trading & Financial Review 
  
  
 
 
planning and optimisation 

The quality of Berkeley’s land bank was enhanced this year following resolution 
to grant planning consent on some 36 schemes. These consents included some 
750 new homes at Fulham Reach, 489 new homes at Chelsea Creek, 275 homes 
at Abell and Cleland House in Westminster and 144 homes at Thameside in Kew. 
At 30 April 2012, 84% of the 26,021 plots in Berkeley’s land bank benefited from 
an implementable planning consent (2011: 77%), a statistic which gives strong 
visibility over the future viability of the land bank. 

Optimising the value of the land bank through planning has traditionally offered 
Berkeley the opportunity to add value while maintaining an efficient balance 
sheet and minimising risk. Equally important is that the revision of planning 
consents often directly supports local communities by funding additional Section 
106 and community benefits that would not otherwise have been delivered and 
ensuring a sustainable use of land, a scarce resource, to build much needed 
homes. Optimisation is invariably demand led, whether this is meeting the need 
for more new homes, changing the mix of homes or changing planning uses to 
meet market requirements which evolve over time. In the year, Berkeley added 
approximately 6% of value to its opening land bank which is in line with historic 
levels and contributed to the outperformance in the growth in the land bank 
compared to its original target. 

The planning outlook in London has been significantly aided by the London Plan 
which governs planning policy in the Capital. Outside London, where there is no 
common framework, planning remains more difficult due to a lack of certainty. 
This year Berkeley, whilst securing some nine new consents outside London,  
also had applications rejected on five sites acquired conditional on securing a 
planning consent, a rate which is unsustainable if it continues at this level. 

The National Planning Policy Framework, published in March of this year, is  
a helpful step forward for the industry, providing a presumption in favour of 
sustainable development when such development will improve and enhance  
the places where people live. This is about developing in the right way, engaging 
with and for the benefit of local people and communities, and is a sensible 
platform from which the industry can work. 

The engagement of developers with local communities is only part of the 
equation. Planning needs to be an effective and positive process with active 
engagement from all parties. Engagement with statutory consultees across a 
range of disciplines, whether the Highways Agency, the Environment Agency, 
English Heritage or Natural England to name but a few, needs to be swift and 
proactive, and this is not currently the case. This is in the spirit of the National 
Planning Policy Framework, and is key to satisfying continuing demand for new 
housing in this country. 

With the introduction over recent years of a wide variety of consultees on every 
planning application, the positive input that this brings must be balanced with 
the increasing cost of securing planning consents. Berkeley works hard to meet 
the aspirations of all interested parties, but acknowledges that underlying 
financial viability, above all on the part of the developer that uses its balance 
sheet to support the delivery of each scheme, is the key to unlocking each of 
its sites. Swift, helpful and proactive engagement from all parties is needed to 
unlock successful development. 

36 

resolutions to grant  
planning consent 

Berkeley annual report 2012

 67 

Trading & Financial ReviewTrading & Financial Review 
trading & Financial review 

68  Berkeley annual report 2012
 

trading & Financial review

£2,580

million
 

estimated gross margin 
in the land bank 

land Bank 

After taking account of homes completed in the year (including joint ventures and 
student rooms at Clapham Junction), and the net addition of further plots through 
replanning and optimisation, the Group (including joint ventures) controlled some 
26,021 plots at 30 April 2012 with an estimated gross margin of £2,580 million. 
This compared to 27,026 plots and £2,304 million at 30 April 2011. The average 
selling price in the land bank increased from £301,000 to £345,000 over the year, 
primarily reflecting the land acquired in London which has a higher average selling 
price than the underlying land bank. 

Berkeley also holds approximately 10,000 further plots in its longer-term pipeline, 
including strategic land under option which requires promotion through the 
planning system as well as long-term regeneration land which is under contract. 
Delivery on this pipeline is constrained not just by planning, but other factors 
including viability and vacant possession which require Berkeley’s expertise to 
unlock value in these plots and bring them into the longer-term land bank. 

Having added £276 million of potential gross margin in 2012 to £2,580 million, 
Berkeley is advancing its target to increase the value of its land bank, after allowing 
for completions over the period, to £3 billion by April 2014, against a previous 
target of April 2015. 

Owned 

Contracted 

Agreed 

Plots * 

Sales value 

Average selling price 

Average plot cost 

Land cost 

Gross margin 

april 2012 

25,755 

246 

20 

26,021 

£8,989m 

£345k 

£55k 

16.0% 

£2,580m 

28.7% 

Change 

-1,110 

+99 

+6 

-1,005 

+£854m 

+£44k 

+£11k 

+1.4% 

+£276m 

+0.4% 

* Includes 1,658 plots within joint ventures at 30 April 2012 (30 April 2011: 1,548) 

April 2011 

26,865 

147 

14 

27,026 

£8,135m 

£301k 

£44k 

14.6% 

£2,304m 

28.3% 

The average selling price in the land bank increased
from £301,000 to £345,000 over the year. 

No.1 Gunwharf Quays, Portsmouth 

Berkeley annual report 2012

 69 

Trading & Financial ReviewTrading & Financial Review 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
Royal Arsenal Riverside, SE18 

delivery of maJor proJects 

20 sites have moved from land not under development into production over 
the course of the year following planning consents and successful sales releases. 
These include St George’s scheme at Fulham Reach on the river in Hammersmith 
and Berkeley’s scheme at Goodmans Fields, where the first phase comprising the 
refurbishment of 75 Leman Street is underway. 

The delivery of residential accommodation this year also included Griffon Studios, 
a post-graduate student scheme at Clapham Junction, complementing the student 
schemes in Acton and Aldgate in London and those in Oxford and Gillingham that 
are due for delivery for the start of the academic years in September 2012 and 
2013 respectively. 

Production levels are at their highest in London, where demand most supports this 
investment. Berkeley has delivered first occupations at Chelsea Creek this year in 
line with previous guidance, with further occupations at our major regeneration 
schemes at Woodberry Park, Kidbrooke Village and Royal Arsenal Riverside. At 
Grosvenor Waterside, where the Group is contracted to sell 334 properties to 
Project Red Limited, a company ultimately controlled by Qatari Diar, some 149 of 
these properties had been completed at 30 April 2012, leaving a balance of 185 
properties to complete at such time as the purchaser, at its discretion, requests 
delivery. Payment has been received in full for all of these properties. 

Berkeley has previously highlighted seven major projects which have planning 
consents and which are scheduled to commence completions over the next five 
years. These projects, in aggregate, comprise some 22% of the value of the 
current land bank, and whilst delivery will be phased over several years, may lead 
to an uneven distribution of earnings and increased average selling price over the 
medium-term depending on the exact date of delivery. 

The seven major projects are The Tower at St George Wharf, Riverlight, Chelsea 
Creek, One Tower Bridge, 375 Kensington High Street, Ebury Square and 190 
Strand. The complex nature and size of these schemes means that it is inherently 
difficult to provide absolute certainty over the timing of delivery, which in some 
cases is up to five years away, as construction can frequently be affected by factors 
outside the direct control of management as well as the risk of any slowdown in 
sales. Delivery of each of these projects is currently at or within the timescales 
previously indicated and further updates will be made to the market in due course. 

Outside London, construction has continued across Berkeley’s portfolio. 
Apartments at Cambridge Riverside and Kingsbrook Park in Canterbury, as well as 
family housing at Edenbrook in Fleet, Queen’s Acre in Beaconsfield and King’s Hill 
in Cirencester, have been occupied in the current year and will benefit future years. 

70  Berkeley annual report 2012 

Trading & Financial Review  
  
 
 
  
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
running a sustainaBle Business 

Berkeley’s corporate plan is to deliver £13 per share to shareholders by 2021  
and to be one of the most successful and sustainable businesses in Britain. 

The challenge for Berkeley is to ensure that all of its stakeholders understand 
and embrace the discipline of running a business for the long-term, making  
the right choices to protect the Berkeley brand, reputation and operational 
performance, and acting with application and integrity. 

This is the role of Vision2020, a framework which sets out a series of specific 
operational commitments across four key areas: The Customer Experience; 
Delivering Sustainable Communities; Building Greener Homes and  
encapsulated by Running a Sustainable Business. 

Berkeley’s approach to Running a Sustainable Business, and what this means  
to Berkeley, is set out in the accompanying section of the same name in this 
Annual Report. 

outlook 

Berkeley is mindful that it continues to operate in an uncertain market, with 
a double-dip recession in the UK and continuing uncertainty across Europe. 

It is, however, a market which creates opportunities for the Group. Land is  
scarce and there is a limited supply of new homes; the economy in London  
and the South East is strong relative to other parts of the UK and less reliant  
on government spending; the planning regime in London is proactive and  
in a region where Berkeley has a competitive advantage. 

In the long-term, restricted supply alongside an increasing demand from a 
concentration of the UK’s population growth in London and the South East is 
likely to ensure that the prospects for new housing in Berkeley’s core market 
remain strong, and the purchase of a new home in the right location is still one  
of the best long-term investments that an individual can make as well as being  
a place in which to live. 

The focus of the business is to return the first milestone of £4.34 per share in 
cash to shareholders by 30 September 2015 and the Board is confident that, 
subject only to the resilience of the wider market, this will be achieved. The 
success of Berkeley now and in the future is reliant on keeping the business  
agile and flexible to act and react quickly in what it knows to be a cyclical 
property market. 

Rob Perrins 
Managing Director 

Berkeley annual report 2012

 71 

Trading & Financial ReviewTrading & Financial Reviewtrading & Financial review 

Project team meeting at Grid 
Architects to discuss 190 Strand 

72  Berkeley annual report 2012 

 
trading and Financial review 

i

T
r
a
d
n
g
a
n
d
F
n
a
n
c
i
a

i

l

R
e
v
i
e
w

Berkeley annual report 2012

 73 

 
 
 
 
Financial review 

headline results 

Revenue 

Operating profit before exceptional item 

Exceptional profit on disposal of subsidiary 

Operating profit 

Net finance costs 

Share of joint ventures result 

Profit before tax 

Tax 

Profit after tax 

Basic earnings per share 

Return on equity 

Units sold 

Average selling price 

*unless otherwise stated 

april 2012 

£’million* 

1,041.1 

195.7 

30.7 

226.4 

(9.4) 

(2.2) 

214.8 

(56.7) 

158.1 

121.0p 

21.2% 

April 2011 

£’million* 

742.6 

135.7 

-

135.7 

(1.5) 

2.1 

136.2 

(41.8) 

94.5 

72.1p 

15.3% 

3,565 units 

£280,000 

2,544 units 

£271,000 

Change 

£’million* 

+298.5 

+60.0 

+30.7 

+90.7 

-7.9 

-4.3 

+78.6 

-14.9 

+63.6 

+48.9p 

+5.9% 

Change 

% 

+40.2% 

+44.2% 

+66.8% 

+57.7% 

+67.3% 

+67.8% 

traDing analysis 

The majority of the Group’s underlying revenue arises from sales of residential 
homes across the Group’s mixed-use schemes. Revenue for the Group was 
£1,041.1 million (2011: £742.6 million) comprising £1,021.7 million of residential 
revenue (2011: £721.4 million), of which £2.1 million was from land sales  
(2011: £13.8 million), and £19.4 million of commercial revenue (2011: £21.2 million). 

Residential revenue, excluding land sales, arose principally from the sale of 3,565 
homes (2011: 2,544) in the year at an average selling price of £280,000 (2011: 
£271,000). During the year new homes were delivered across Berkeley’s portfolio 
of developments including the major regeneration schemes at Woodberry Park, 
Kidbrooke Village and Royal Arsenal Riverside, higher value riverside schemes at 
Chelsea Creek, Battersea Reach and Kew Riverside, and housing schemes outside 
London at Queen’s Acre in Beaconsfield, King’s Hill in Cirencester and Edenbrook in 
Fleet amongst others. The increase in average selling price predominantly reflects 
changes in the mix of homes delivered in the year compared to previous years. 

Revenue from land sales comprises £2.1million (2011: £13.8 million) which 
includes the disposal of one site in the year (2011: three). 

£19.4 million (2011: £21.2 million) of revenue from commercial activities includes 
the sale of 54,000 sq ft of commercial space across a number of the Group’s 
mixed-use developments. The most significant of these were the development 
and sale of a hotel at Blackheath, a storage facility at Royal Arsenal Riverside and 
a Community Centre at Woodberry Park. 

74  Berkeley annual report 2012 

Trading & Financial Review 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
proFit BeFore tax 

Profit before tax increased by £78.6 million (57.7%) to £214.8 million in the year. 
This was due to a combination of five factors: 

Profit before tax: 2010/11 

Increase in gross margin 

Increase in overheads 

Exceptional profit on disposal of subsidiary 

Increase in net finance costs 

Reduction in result from joint ventures 

Profit before tax: 2011/12 

£’million 

136.2 

+86.3 

-26.2 

+30.7 

-7.9 

-4.3 

214.8 

Berkeley’s gross margin has increased by £86.3 million (41.2%) in the year in line 
with the underlying revenue increase of 40.2% and a marginal increase in gross 
margin percentage from 0.2% to 28.4% since last year based on the mix of 
homes sold. 

Overheads have increased by £26.2 million to £99.6 million, but reduced as  
a percentage of revenue from 9.9% to 9.6%, and so are in line with the growth  
of the business and also reflect the first year’s charge under the 2011 LTIP. 
Pre-exceptional operating margin of 18.8% compares with 18.3% last year, 
reflecting both the underlying increase in gross margin and the lower percentage 
of operating costs expensed in the year. The operating margin is at the top  
of the range of levels reported in recent periods. 

On 30 September 2011 Berkeley sold its 51% equity interest in a company 
co-owned with Imperial College. The company had developed the first phase 
of 452 postgraduate student bedrooms at its scheme in Clapham Junction in 
London, let to postgraduate students of Imperial College, and the second phase 
of 114 rooms is expected to be delivered in September 2012. Berkeley’s share of 
the proceeds of the sale of the company was £75.7 million and this resulted in an 
exceptional profit on disposal of £30.7 million. 

Berkeley’s share of the post-tax results of joint ventures was a loss of £2.2 million 
(2011: profit of £2.1 million) which reflects a combination of the timing of 
completions from St Edward’s first scheme at Stanmore Place alongside investment 
in its delivery pipeline at 375 Kensington High Street and at 190 Strand. 

Net finance costs have increased from £1.5 million to £9.4 million. The key 
reason for this is the change from a net cash to a net debt position over the 
course of the year as a result of the continued investment in the business. 

earnings per share 

Basic earnings per share increased in the year by 67.8% from 72.1 pence to 
121.0 pence. This increase is due to a combination of the 57.7% increase in 
profit before tax to £214.8 million, a decrease in the Group’s effective tax rate 
from 31.1% to 26.1%, principally due to a reduction in the UK corporation tax 
rate, and a marginal reduction in the weighted average number of shares from 
131,962,000 to 131,042,000. 

Berkeley annual report 2012

 75 

Trading & Financial ReviewTrading & Financial Review 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
  
 
 
 
£214.8 
million 

profit before tax 

£1,157.7
million 

capital employed 

Financial position 

Capital Employed 

Investment properties 

Other non-current assets 

Inventories 

Trade and other receivables 

Trade and other payables 

- Deposits and on account receipts 

- Other trade payables 

Current tax liabilities 

Capital employed 

april 2012 

£’million 

83.5 

100.3 

1,851.7 

115.2 

(422.9) 

(470.2) 

(99.9) 

1,157.7 

Change 

£’million 

+54.9 

+15.0 

+238.5 

+18.5 

+49.1 

-104.1 

-6.0 

+265.9 

April 2011 

£’million 

28.6 

85.3 

1,613.2 

96.7 

(472.0)

(366.1) 

(93.9) 

891.8 

The strong underlying operating performance has been balanced with controlled 
investment in the future of the business. Shareholder equity has increased by 
£170.4 million to £1,099.8 million, while capital employed increased by  
£265.9 million to £1,157.7 million, some 29.8% higher than at the start of the year. 

Investment properties represent 612 properties developed by the Group (30 April 
2011: 215) which are included in Berkeley’s private rental fund and have increased 
by £54.9 million to £83.5 million (30 April 2011: £28.6 million) at historic cost. The 
Homes and Communities Agency has committed £12.5 million, classified as debt, 
to fund 358 of these properties (30 April 2011: £6.5 million on 100 properties).  
The total number of properties expected to be held by the fund is 802, leaving  
a further 190 to complete of which 176 will be subject to £4.9 million of further 
funding from the Homes and Communities Agency, taking their total planned 
investment to £17.4 million over 534 properties. Whilst it had originally been 
intended for the Group to hold some 896 properties, 94 have been marketed  
for sale opportunistically and so will no longer be held for investment. 

Other non-current assets include £17.2 million of goodwill (30 April 2011: 
£17.2 million) which arose on the acquisition of St James Group Ltd in November 
2006, £11.6 million of property, plant and equipment (30 April 2011: £10.6 million), 
£46.5 million investment in joint ventures (30 April 2011: £38.7 million) which has 
increased through £7.8 million of net investment in the year, and £25.0 million  
of deferred tax assets (30 April 2011: £18.9 million) which have increased by  
£8.2 million in respect of timing difference offset by a £2.1 million reduction due 
to the reduction in the UK corporation tax rate. 

Change in inventory 

30 april 2012 

Change 

30 April 2011 

£’million 

£’million 

£’million 

Land not under development 

Work in progress: land cost 

Work in progress: build cost 

Completed units 

360.5 

723.8 

1,084.3 

698.8 

68.6 

1,851.7 

+43.9 

+91.9 

+135.8 

+83.1 

+19.6 

+238.5 

316.6 

631.9 

948.5 

615.7 

49.0 

1,613.2 

76  Berkeley annual report 2012 

Trading & Financial Review 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
    
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
cash Flow 

Cash Flow and Net Assets 

Profit before tax 

Exceptional profit on disposal of subsidiary 

Increase in inventory – land 

Increase in inventory – build WIP and stock 

Other working capital movements 

Taxation 

Proceeds on disposal of subsidiary 

Other investing activities 

Non-cash and other movements 

Share purchases 

Decrease in net cash 

Opening net cash 

Closing net (debt) / cash 

Capital employed 

Net assets 

Non-controlling interest 

Net assets attributable to shareholders 

Net assets per share 

*unless otherwise stated 

april 2012 

£’million 

214.8 

(30.7) 

184.1 

(135.8) 

(102.7) 

(76.4) 

(314.9) 

(53.7) 

75.7 

(12.3) 

21.2 

(99.9) 

-

(99.9) 

42.0 

(57.9) 

1,157.7 

1,099.8 

-

1,099.8 

839.3p 

April 2011 

£’million 

136.2 

-

136.2 

(207.4) 

(151.7) 

14.1 

(345.0) 

(32.6) 

-

(11.0) 

7.5 

(244.9) 

(30.0) 

(274.9)
 

316.9
 

42.0
 

891.8
 

933.8
 

(4.4)
 

929.4 

709.2p 

Inventories have increased by £238.5 million to £1,851.7 million (30 April 2011: 
£1,613.2 million) and comprise land not under development of £360.5 million 
(30 April 2011: £316.6 million), work in progress of £1,422.6 million (30 April 
2011: £1,247.6 million) and completed units of £68.6 million (30 April 2011: 
£49.0 million). 

During the year, the Group acquired 20 new sites in good locations across 
London and the South East, and invested in the planning, optimisation and 
delivery of current schemes as production levels have increased over the  
course of the year. 

Trade and other receivables have increased from £96.7 million to £115.2 million 
due to a higher level of completions towards the end of the year. 

Trade and other payables have increased by £54.9 million to £893.1 million 
(£30.4 million non-current and £862.7 million current) similarly reflecting the 
growth of the business. Included within trade creditors are £422.9 million of  
on account receipts (30 April 2011: £472.0), which, together with cash due on 
forward sales of £1,055.7 million at 30 April 2012 (30 April 2011: £813.5 million), 
matches the majority of the increased investment in inventory and provides a 
significant hedge against market risk. 

A net cash outflow of £99.9 million in the year took the Group from a net cash 
position of £42.0 million at 30 April 2011 to a net debt position of £57.9 million 
at 30 April 2012. 

Berkeley annual report 2012

 77 

Trading & Financial ReviewTrading & Financial Review 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
  
21.2%
 

return on equity 

£525 

million
 

new banking facilities 

78  Berkeley annual report 2012 

Key to this movement was the controlled investment in the business in the year 
through a £314.9 million net investment in working capital (2011: £345.0 million). 
This included a £135.8 million net investment in land (2011: £207.4 million) and 
£102.7 million in construction (2011: £151.7 million) along with other working 
capital increases of £76.4 million (2011: reduction of £14.1 million) which included 
continued investment in the Group’s rental fund properties in the year and other 
movements. This increased investment in the business should be viewed in 
conjunction with a £242.2 million increase in cash due on forward sales which 
underlines the way in which Berkeley manages balance sheet risk. 

The cash flow reflects the proceeds of £75.7 million from the sale of Berkeley’s 
51% equity interest in the company co-owned with Imperial College, which gave 
rise to an exceptional profit on disposal of £30.7 million. Following the disposal 
of this company, there is no longer a non-controlling interest at 30 April 2012.  
At 30 April 2011, this represented Imperial College’s 49% share in this subsidiary. 

The Group paid tax of £53.7 million, compared to £32.6 million in 2011,  
which is in line with the growth of the business. 

Non cash items and other movements, which principally relate to timing 
differences on interest receipts and payments and the effects of share based 
payments accounting, including the effect of the introduction of the 2011 LTIP  
in the year, are £21.2 million compared to £7.5 million last year. 

Cash flows from financing activities last year were an outflow of £30.0 million 
arising from the acquisition of own shares during the course of the year.  
There were no such purchases in 2012. 

Combined with a £265.9 million increase in capital employed in the year, the  
net cash outflow of £99.9 million has increased net assets from £933.8 million  
to £1,099.8 million at 30 April 2012. This has led to an increase in net assets  
per share from 709.2 pence last year to 839.3 pence at 30 April 2012. 

return on equity 

Return on equity, a core performance target for Berkeley, was 21.2% in 2012 
(2011: 15.3%), reflecting the strong trading performance reported, in the context 
of a controlled investment in balance sheet assets. This increase has arisen from 
a 57.7% increase in profit before tax alongside a 13.5% increase in average 
equity for the year. 

taxation 

The Group’s policy is to pay the amount of tax legally due and to observe all 
applicable rules and regulations. At the same time we have an obligation to 
maximise shareholder value and to manage financial and reputational risk. This 
includes minimising and controlling our tax costs, as we look to do for all costs  
of our business. Factors that may affect the Group’s tax charge include changes 
in legislation, the impact of corporate activity (restructuring, acquisitions, 
disposals, etc), the resolution of open tax issues from prior years and planning 
opportunities. The Group makes provisions for potential tax liabilities that may 
arise, however the amount ultimately paid may differ from the amount accrued. 

Banking Facilities 

The Group’s financial position today is further supported by the re-negotiation  
of the Group’s banking facilities since the year end. On 24 May 2012, Berkeley 
increased its committed corporate banking facilities from £450 million to  
£525 million, of which £250 million expires in April 2017 and £275 million in 
May 2017. With £200 million of the Group’s £450 million having been due to 
expire in November 2013, the new facilities effectively provide clarity of financing 
at £525 million for five years through to April 2017. In addition, Berkeley has a 
further £60 million of banking facilities in St Edward Homes, of which £3 million 
was utilised at the year end, if required, to finance the delivery of its schemes. 

Trading & Financial Review 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
Joint ventures 

St Edward Homes is Berkeley’s joint venture with Prudential, which is developing 
Stanmore Place and 375 Kensington High Street, and which also now plans to 
develop a scheme at 190 Strand in London. During the year, 188 homes were 
sold at Stanmore Place at an average selling price of £170,000 (2011: 164 homes 
at £251,000). Berkeley’s land bank includes some 1,658 plots in respect of St 
Edward Homes’ schemes (2011: 1,548 plots), and Berkeley continues to work 
with Prudential to identify further sites to which St Edward Homes can add value. 

Investments accounted for using the equity method of £46.5 million (30 April 
2011: £38.7 million) relate to Berkeley’s interest in these schemes. 

Financial risk 

The Group finances its operations by a combination of shareholders’ funds, 
non-controlling interest, deposits and on account receipts and borrowings 
where drawn. 

As the Group’s operations are in sterling there is no direct significant currency 
risk, and therefore the Group’s main financial risks are primarily: 

–  Liquidity risk - the risk that suitable funding for the Group’s activities may not 

be available. 

–  Market credit risk - the risk that a counterparty will default on their contractual 
obligations resulting in a loss to the Group. The Group’s exposure to credit risk 
is comprised of the cash and cash equivalents and trade and other receivables 
held within current assets on the consolidated balance sheet. 

–  Market interest rate risk - the risk that Group financing activities are adversely 

affected by fluctuations in market interest rates. 

The Board approves treasury policy and senior management control day-to-day 
operations. Relationships with banks and cash management are co-ordinated 
centrally. The objectives of the treasury policy are to maintain an appropriate 
capital structure and in doing so manage the financial risks identified above. 
The procedures for mitigation of the financial risks are set out in note 23 of the 
consolidated financial statements. 

operating risk 

All businesses are exposed to risk. Indeed, alongside risk comes opportunity and it 
is how such risks are managed that determines the success of the Group’s strategy 
and, ultimately, its performance and results. Berkeley’s strategy allows management 
to focus on creating sustainable long-term value for its shareholders, whilst taking 
advantage of opportunities as they arise in the short and medium-term. 

Risk management is embedded in the organisation at operating company, 
divisional and Group levels, with different types of risk requiring different levels 
and types of management response. 

The principal operating risks of the Group which have been considered by the 
Board include, but are not limited to, the risks as set out on pages 80 and 81. 

The Internal Control section within the Corporate Governance report on pages 
109 to 110 sets out the Group’s overall framework for internal control, setting the 
context for the identification, control and monitoring of these and other risks 
faced by the Group. 

Nick simpkin 
Finance Director 

Berkeley annual report 2012

 79 

Trading & Financial ReviewTrading & Financial Review 
  
 
   
   
   
 
 
 
  
 
  
 
 
 
 
Berkeley’s principal  
operating risks 

Risk Descriptions 

Mitigation 

econoMic conDitions 

As a property developer Berkeley’s 
business, in the context of the wider 
Housing Market, is sensitive to changes 
in interest rates, unemployment and 
general consumer confidence. 

Significant economic uncertainty exists in 
the UK, Europe and worldwide and this 
may lead to a reduction in demand for 
housing which could impact on the Group’s 
ability to deliver its corporate strategy. 

regulation 

Adverse changes to government policy  
on areas such as taxation, housing and 
environmental matters could restrict the 
ability of the Group to deliver its strategy. 

Failure to comply with laws and regulations 
could expose the Group to penalties and 
reputational damage. 

planning 

Delays or refusals in obtaining  
commercially viable planning permissions 
on the Group’s land holdings could result  
in the Group being unable to develop  
the land it has purchased. 

This could have a direct impact on the 
Group’s ability to deliver its product  
and on its profitability. 

people 

An inability to attract, develop, motivate 
and retain talented employees could have 
an impact on the Group’s ability to deliver 
its strategic priorities. 

Failure to consider the retention and succession 
of key management could result in a loss of 
knowledge and competitive advantage. 

sales 

An inability to match supply to demand in 
terms of product, location and price could 
result in missed sales targets and / or 
inefficient levels of completed stock which 
in turn could impact on the Group’s ability 
to deliver its corporate strategy. 

Mortgage availaBility 

Berkeley’s business strategy reflects the cyclical nature of property development. 

Funds are carefully targeted at investing only in land which is underpinned by demand 
fundamentals that support a solid viability case even when markets are uncertain. 

Levels of committed expenditure are carefully monitored against sales secured and bank 
facilities available, with the objective of keeping financial risk low to mitigate the 
operating risks of delivery in uncertain markets. 

The business is committed to operating at an optimal size, with a strong balance sheet,  
to maintain the flexibility to react swiftly, when necessary, to changes in market conditions. 

The effects of changes to government policies at all levels are closely monitored and 
representations made where necessary. 

Berkeley’s experienced teams are well-placed to interpret and implement new regulation 
at the appropriate time through direct lines of communication across the Group. 

Detailed policies and procedures are in place and these are communicated to all staff. 

Full detailed planning and risk assessments are performed and monitored for each site 
without planning permission, both before and after purchase. 

The planning status of all sites is reviewed at monthly divisional Board meetings and 
bi-monthly Main Board meetings. 

The Group works closely with local communities in respect of planning proposals and 
strong local relationships are maintained with local authorities and planning officers. 

The Group is focused on the markets of London and the South East of England in 
planning regimes which it understands and where it believes it therefore has a 
competitive advantage. 

Remuneration packages are constantly benchmarked against the industry to ensure they 
remain competitive. 

Succession planning is regularly reviewed at both divisional and Main Board level. 

Close relationships and dialogue are maintained with key personnel. 

Detailed market demand assessments of each site are undertaken before acquisition, 
and regularly during delivery of each scheme, to ensure that supply is matched to 
demand in each location. 

Design, product type and product quality are all assessed on a site-by-site basis to 
ensure that they meet the target market and customer aspirations in that location. 

The Group has a diverse range of developments with homes available at a broad range 
of property prices to appeal to a wide market. 

Forward sales are used to take the risk out of the development cycle where possible, 
thereby justifying the financial investment in each of the Group’s sites. 

Completed stock levels are reviewed and debated at monthly divisional Board meetings 
and bi-monthly Main Board meetings. 

Mortgage providers have been negatively 
impacted by the financial crisis and this has  mortgage availability across its portfolio. 
reduced their ability to provide mortgages 
to potential purchasers. 

The Group is participating in the government-backed mortgage indemnity scheme, 
NewBuy, on a number of its schemes. 

Berkeley has a broad product mix and customer base which reduces the reliance on 

An inability of customers to secure sufficient 
mortgage finance could have a direct impact 
on the Group’s transaction levels. 

Deposits are taken on all sales to mitigate the financial impact on the Group in the  
event that sales do not complete due to a lack of mortgage availability. 

80  Berkeley annual report 2012 

Trading & Financial Review 
 
 
 
 
 
Risk Descriptions 

sustainaBility 

Mitigation 

Berkeley is hugely aware of the 
environmental impact of the homes and 
communities that it builds, both during the 
construction phase and on occupation by 
its customers. 

Failure to address sustainability issues 
could affect the Group’s ability to acquire 
land, gain planning permission, manage 
sites effectively and respond to increasing 
customer demand for sustainable homes. 

Vision2020 provides the framework under which the Group’s approach to 
running a sustainable business is formalised. This provides a series of 
over-arching areas of focus along with detailed commitments to be adopted 
and embraced by all staff. 

A Board level Sustainability and Health & Safety Governance Committee has 
the responsibility of setting the Group’s direction in this area, to ensure that it 
is aligned with the Group’s strategy. 

Specific commitments to deliver sustainable communities, minimise the 
impact of the homes that Berkeley builds and to manage the environmental 
impacts of Berkeley’s business form the bedrock of this approach. 

Sustainability assessments are built into land purchases and planning applications. 
Sustainability commitments during delivery include the use of environmental 
performance methodology, a focus on brownfield development and the 
monitoring of carbon emissions, amongst others. 

health anD saFety 

Berkeley’s operations have a direct impact 
on the Health and Safety of its people, 
contractors and members of the public. 
Berkeley considers this to be an area of 
critical importance. 

A lack of adequate procedures and systems 
to reduce the dangers inherent in the 
construction process increases the risk of 
accidents or site related catastrophes, 
including fire and flood, which could result 
in serious injury or loss of life leading to 
reputational damage, financial penalties  
and disruption to operations. 

A Board level Sustainability / Health and Safety Governance Committee has 
the responsibility of setting the Group’s Health and Safety strategy. 

Dedicated Health & Safety teams are in place in each division and at Head 
Office. Procedures, training and reporting are all regularly reviewed to ensure 
high standards are maintained, and comprehensive accident investigation 
procedures are in place. 

The Group has implemented a number of initiatives to improve Health and 
Safety standards on site, with workshops held with contractors during the year. 

Vision2020 incorporates commitments in the area of Health & Safety which 
reinforce the Group’s focus on this. 

Adequate insurance is held to cover the risks inherent in large-scale 
construction projects. 

lanD availaBility 

An inability to source suitable land to 
maintain the Group’s land bank at 
appropriate margins in a highly competitive 
market could impact on the Group’s  
ability to deliver its corporate strategy. 

Berkeley’s strategy is to acquire land opportunistically, where it meets its 
internal criteria for purchase. 

Land acquisition is focused on Berkeley’s core markets of London and the 
South East, markets which it understands and where it believes that the 
demand fundamentals are strong. 

Each land acquisition is subject to formal internal appraisal and approval 
processes both prior to the submission of a bid and again prior to exchange 
of contracts. 

The Group maintains a land bank to mitigate against significant impacts from 
market changes or delayed build activity. Berkeley has experienced land 
teams with strong market knowledge in its areas of focus. 

BuilD cost anD prograMMe 

Build costs are affected by the availability of 
skilled labour and the price and availability 
of materials. Changes to these prices and 
availability could impact on the profitability 
of each scheme. 

proDuct quality 

Berkeley has a reputation for the high 
standards of quality of its product.  
If the Group fails to deliver against  
these standards, it could be exposed  
to reputational damage, as well as  
reduced sales and increased cost. 

A procurement and programming strategy for each development is agreed 
by the divisional Board before site acquisition. 

A further assessment of procurement and programming is undertaken and 
agreed by the divisional Board prior to the commencement of construction. 

Build cost reconciliations and build programme dates are presented and 
reviewed in detail at divisional cost review meetings each month. 

Detailed reviews are undertaken of the product on each scheme both during 
the acquisition of the site and throughout the build process to ensure that 
the quality of the product is maintained. 

Customer Satisfaction surveys are undertaken on the handover of all private 
apartments, and feedback incorporated in shaping the specification and 
quality of subsequent schemes. 

Berkeley annual report 2012

 81 

Trading & Financial ReviewTrading & Financial Review 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
governance 

governance 
Berkeley’s strategy is 
dedicated to delivering 
its long-term 
corporate oBJectives. 

82  Berkeley annual report 2012 

 
  
  
governance 

g
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

Berkeley annual report 2012

 83
 

 
BoarD oF Directors
 

chairMan anD executive Directors 

current coMMittee 
coMposition 

Nomination Committee 
A W Pidgley (Chairman)  
D Howell 
J Armitt 
V Wadley 

Audit Committee 
D Howell (Chairman) 
A C Coppin 
A Nimmo 

Remuneration Committee 
A C Coppin (Chairman) 
J Armitt 
G Barker 

Company Secretary 
A M Bradshaw 

Honorary Life President 
Jim Farrer MRICS, along  
with Tony Pidgley a co-founder of 
Berkeley, he was Group Chairman 
until his retirement in 1992.  
At that time he was appointed 
Honorary Life President. 

84  Berkeley annual report 2012 

tony piDgley 

roB perrins  
Bsc (hons) aca 

nick siMpkin  
aca 

Co-founder of the Company 
in 1976 with Jim Farrer.  
He was appointed Group 
Chairman on 9 September  
2009, having previously been 
the Group Managing Director 
since the formation of the 
Group in 1976. He is Chairman 
of the Nomination Committee. 

Joined the Company in 1994 
having qualified as a chartered 
accountant with Ernst & Young 
in 1991. He was appointed to 
the Group Main Board on 1 May 
2001 on becoming Managing 
Director of Berkeley Homes plc. 
He became Group Finance 
Director on 2 November 2001, 
moving to his current role as 
Group Managing Director on  
9 September 2009. 

Joined Berkeley in 2002 and has 
held a number of senior finance 
positions including Finance 
Director of St James and Head 
of Finance for Berkeley Group. 
He joined the Board and 
became Group Finance Director 
on 10 September 2009. 

karl whiteMan 

sean ellis 

greg Fry aca 

Joined Berkeley in 1996 as 
a Construction Director and 
currently leads the largest 
Berkeley Homes division and 
chairs the Group’s Sustainability 
and Health & Safety Working 
Groups. He joined the Board  
on 10 September 2009 as a 
Divisional Executive Director. 

Joined Berkeley in 2004 
with an expertise in land 
and is currently Chairman  
of St James Group. He joined 
the Group Main Board on  
9 September 2010 as a 
Divisional Executive Director. 

Joined the Group in 1982 and is 
currently Chairman of St George 
PLC, having been a Director 
since its inception in 1986. He 
was reappointed to the Group 
Main Board on 5 September 
2011 as a Divisional Executive 
Director, having previously been 
a member of the Group Main 
Board from 1 May 1996 to 22 
July 2010. 

Governance 
 
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
non-executive Directors 

sir John arMitt 

victoria Mitchell 

DaviD howell 

alan coppin 

Appointed a Non-executive 
Director on 1 October 2007. 
He is currently Chairman of the 
Olympic Delivery Authority and 
was Chairman of the Engineering 
and Physical Science Research 
Council until 31 March 2012. 
From 2001 to 2007 he was Chief 
Executive of Network Rail and its 
predecessor, Railtrack. Sir John is 
the Senior Independent Director, 
Chairman of the Group’s 
Sustainability and Health & 
Safety Committee and is a 
member of the Remuneration 
and Nomination Committees. 

Appointed a Non-executive 
Director on 1 May 2002 and 
became Group Chairman on 
1 August 2007, moving to her 
current role as Deputy Chairman 
on 9 September 2009. Currently 
a Consultant Director of Savills 
(L and P) Limited, she was 
previously an Executive Director 
of Savills plc. She is currently a 
Non-executive Director of Pam 
Golding International (Pty), 
Development Securities plc, 
Lennox Investment Management 
LLP and London First. She will 
stand down from the Board at 
the AGM on 5 September 2012. 

Appointed a Non-executive 
Director and Chairman of the 
Audit Committee on 25 February 
2004. Previously a Main Board 
Director of lastminute.com plc, 
Group Finance Director of First 
Choice Holidays plc, Executive 
Chairman of Western and 
Oriental plc, Chairman of EBTM 
plc (Everything but the Music) 
and a Non-executive Director 
of Nestor Healthcare Group 
plc, David is currently a 
Non-executive Director of two 
private companies. David is 
also a member of the 
Nomination Committee. 

Appointed a Non-executive 
Director on 1 September 2006. 
He is currently a Non-executive 
Director of Marshalls plc and  
a member of both the Royal 
Air Force Board Standing 
Committee and Air Command 
(formerly Strike Command). 
Previously Hon. Chairman of 
The Prince’s Foundation for  
the Built Environment and  
a Non-executive Director at 
Capital and Regional plc and 
Carillion plc, Alan is Chairman 
of the Remuneration 
Committee and a member 
of the Audit Committee. 

alison niMMo 

veronica waDley 

Appointed a Non-executive 
Director on 5 September 
2011. Alison is currently 
Chief Executive of The Crown 
Estate and she was previously 
responsible for delivering many 
of the London 2012 Olympic 
and Paralympic venues as 
Director of Regeneration and 
Design at the Olympic Delivery 
Authority. She is a member of 
the Audit, Sustainability and 
Health & Safety Committees. 

Appointed a Non-executive 
Director on 3 January 2012.  
She is currently Chair of the  
Arts Council, London and 
a National Council member 
of Arts Council England. 
Previously Editor of The  
Evening Standard, she is also  
an Independent Director of 
Times Newspapers Holdings. 
She is a member of the 
Nomination Committee. 

glyn Barker Bsc  
(hons) Fca 

Appointed a Non-executive 
Director on 3 January 2012 
following a 35 year career with 
PwC, most recently as its UK Vice 
Chairman. He previously held 
a number of senior posts within 
PwC including Managing 
Partner and Head of Assurance 
and also established and 
ran their Transactions Services 
business. Glyn is a Non-executive 
Director of Aviva plc and 
Transocean Limited, Chairman 
Designate of the Law Firm 
Irwin Mitchell and a Director of 
the English National Opera 
Company. He is a member of 
the Remuneration Committee. 

Berkeley annual report 2012

 85 

GovernanceGovernance 
  
  
  
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
  
 
 
 
  
  
 
  
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
 
 
  
 
The Directors submit their report together with the audited consolidated and company financial statements for the year ended  
30 April 2012. 

PrinciPal activities and review of the business 

The Company is a UK listed holding company of a Group engaged in residential-led property development focusing on urban 
regeneration and mixed-use developments. The Company is incorporated and domiciled in England and Wales and is quoted on the 
London Stock Exchange. 

The information that fulfils the requirements of the business review can be found in the Chairman’s statement on page 6, the Managing 
Director’s statement on page 7, the Trading and Financial review on pages 64 to 79, which provides more detailed commentaries on the 
business during the year together with the outlook for the future, and the section on Running a Sustainable Business on pages 48 to 61. 

In addition, information in respect of the principal financial and operating risks of the business is set out in the Trading and Financial 
review on page 79. 

trading results and dividends 

The Group’s consolidated profit after taxation for the financial year was £158,147,000 (2011: £94,456,000). The Group’s joint ventures 
contributed a loss after taxation of £2,192,000 (2011: profit of £2,059,000). 

No dividends were declared or paid in the financial year. 

share caPital 

The Company had 134,857,183 ordinary shares in issue at 30 April 2012 (2011: 134,857,183). The Company holds 3,577,506 of its own 
shares in treasury (2011: 3,577,506). 

Authority will be sought from shareholders at the forthcoming Annual General Meeting to renew the authority given at the 2011 Annual 
General Meeting for a further year, permitting the Company to purchase its own shares in the market up to a limit of 10% of its issued 
share capital. 

Movements in the Company’s share capital are shown in note 18 to the consolidated financial statements. 

Information on the Group’s share option schemes is set out in note 5 to the consolidated financial statements. Details of the Long-Term 
Incentive Schemes and Long-Term Incentive Plans for key executives are set out in the Remuneration Committee report on pages 89 to 105. 

articles of association 

The Articles of Association set out the basic management and administrative structure of the Company. They regulate the internal affairs 
of the Company and cover such matters as the issue and transfer of shares, Board and shareholder meetings, powers and duties of 
Directors and borrowing powers. In accordance with the Articles of Association, Directors can be appointed or removed by shareholders 
in a general meeting. 

The Articles may only be amended by special resolution at a general meeting of shareholders. Copies are available by writing to the 
Company Secretary and are also open to inspection at Companies House. 

directors 

The Directors of the Company and their profiles are detailed on pages 84 and 85. All of the Directors served throughout the year under 
review with the exception of Greg Fry and Alison Nimmo, who were both appointed to the Board on 5 September 2011, and Glyn Barker 
and Veronica Wadley, who were both appointed to the Board on 3 January 2012. 

The Articles of Association of the Company require Directors to submit themselves for re-election every three years. In addition all 
Directors are subject to re-election at the first opportunity after their appointment to the Board. However, in accordance with the UK 
Corporate Governance Code all the Directors will offer themselves for re-election at the forthcoming Annual General Meeting, other than 
Victoria Mitchell who is standing down from the Board. 

The Directors’ interests in the share capital of the Company and its subsidiaries are shown in the Remuneration Committee report on page 
105. At 30 April 2012 each of the Executive Directors were deemed to have a non-beneficial interest in 237,363 (2011: 237,363) ordinary 
shares held by the Trustees of The Berkeley Group Employee Benefit Trust. 

There were no contracts of significance during, or at the end of, the financial year in which a Director of the Company is, or was, materially 
interested, other than those set out in note 24 to the consolidated financial statements, the contracts of employment of the Executive 
Directors, which are terminable within one year, and the appointment terms of the Non-executive Directors, which are renewable annually 
and terminable on one month’s notice. 

86  Berkeley Annual Report 2012 

GovernanceDIRECTORS’ REpORT 
 
directors’ indemnities 

The Company’s practice has always been to indemnify its Directors in accordance with the Company’s Articles of Association and to the 
maximum extent permitted by law. As at the date of this report, indemnities are in force under which the Company has agreed to 
indemnify the Directors, in accordance with the Company’s Articles of Association and to the maximum extent permitted by law, in respect 
of all costs, charges, expenses, losses and liabilities, which they may incur in or about the execution of their duties to the Company, or any 
entity which is an associated company (as defined in Section 256 of the Companies Act 2006), or as a result of duties performed by the 
Directors on behalf of the Company or any such associated company. 

substantial shareholders 

The Company has been notified of the following interests, pursuant to Rule 5 of the Disclosure Rules and Transparency Rules amounting 
to 3% or more of the issued capital of the Company, as at 19 July 2012: 

Number of ordinary 
shares held 

% of issued capital(1) 

Nature of holding 

Lloyds Banking Group plc 

First Eagle Investment Management, LLC 

Mirabaud Investment Management Ltd 

Anthony William Pidgley 

Blackrock Inc 

Standard Life Investments Ltd 

(1) Net of shares held in treasury. 

donations 

17,043,398 

14,451,198 

6,543,445 

6,456,838 

6,159,637 

5,005,879 

12.98% 

11.01% 

4.98% 

4.92% 

4.69% 

3.81% 

Indirect 

Indirect 

Indirect 

Direct 

Indirect 

Direct/Indirect 

During the year, donations by the Group for charitable purposes in the United Kingdom, including through the Berkeley Foundation, 
amounted to £789,000 (2011: £574,000). The Group made no political contributions (2011: £nil) during the year. 

emPloyment Policy 

The Group’s policy of operating through autonomous subsidiaries has ensured close consultation with employees on matters likely to 
affect their interests. The Group is firmly committed to the continuation and strengthening of communication lines with all its employees. 

An Equal Opportunities Policy was introduced in 2001. Following periodic reviews (the most recent in September 2010) the policy is now 
an Equality and Diversity Policy with the aim of ensuring that all employees, potential employees and other individuals receive equal 
treatment (including access to employment, training and opportunity for promotion) regardless of their age, disability, gender 
reassignment, marriage and civil partnership, pregnancy and maternity, race, religion or belief (including lack of belief), sex and sexual 
orientation. It is the policy of the Group to support the employment of people with disabilities wherever practicable and to ensure, as far 
as possible, the training, career development and promotion opportunities are available to all employees. This policy includes employees 
who become disabled whilst employed by the Group. 

sustainability 

Each year Berkeley produces a Sustainability Report to provide its stakeholders with a full and transparent account of how its sustainability 
strategy and policies are put into practice throughout the Group. 

This year Berkeley has produced a Sustainability Report Executive Summary which provides an overview of the progress made against its 
sustainability strategy for the period from May 2011 to April 2012. It contains a short explanation of Vision2020, key achievements in the 
year and summary performance data against Key Performance Indicators. A number of short case studies are also provided to 
demonstrate how Berkeley incorporates sustainability into its business operations. 

More extensive information on sustainability performance is available on Berkeley’s website, including a full explanation of Vision2020, 
detailed performance data and more case studies. Once again, Berkeley has applied the Global Reporting Initiative (GRI) Sustainability 
Reporting Principles to its executive summary report and website in order to give a balanced and relevant account of its sustainability 
performance. 

For further information and to download a copy of the Sustainability Report Executive Summary, please refer to the sustainability section 
of Berkeley’s website. 

Berkeley Annual Report 2012

 87 

GovernanceGovernance 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
health and safety 

The Group considers the effective management of health and safety to be an integral part of managing its business. Accordingly, the 
Group Main Board continues to monitor the strategic development and audit the implementation by all divisions of their Occupational 
Health & Safety Management Systems to ensure that, both at Group and divisional level, they remain compliant with recognised 
established standards. 

We remain committed to enhancing the Group’s high standards through continuous improvement. Our Health & Safety Governance 
Committee is responsible for setting the strategic objectives of the Group, and the Health & Safety Working Group, comprising divisional 
executives and managers, is responsible for delivering these objectives and reviewing progress against targets set for our established key 
performance indicators, reporting this quarterly to the Group Main Board. For further information, please refer to the section on Running a 
Sustainable Business on pages 48 to 61. 

essential contracts 

Berkeley has contractual and other arrangements with numerous third parties in support of its business activities. None of the 
arrangements are individually considered to be essential to the business of Berkeley. 

Payment of creditors 

Each of the Group’s operating companies is responsible for agreeing the terms and conditions, including terms of payment, relating to 
transactions with its suppliers. This is on an individual contract basis, rather than following a standard code. It is Group policy to abide by 
the agreed terms of payment where the supplier has provided the goods and services in accordance with the relevant terms and 
conditions of contract. At 30 April 2012, the Company did not have any trade creditors (2011: £nil). 

takeover directive – agreements 

Pursuant to the Companies Act 2006, the Company is required to disclose whether there are any significant agreements that take effect, 
alter or terminate upon a change of control. 

Change of control provisions are included as standard in many types of commercial agreement, notably bank facility agreements and joint 
venture shareholder agreements, for the protection of both parties. Such standard terms are included in Berkeley’s bank facility agreement 
which contains provisions that give the banks certain rights upon a change of control of the Company. Similarly, in certain circumstances, a 
change of control may give Berkeley’s joint venture partner, Prudential Assurance Company Limited, the ability to exercise certain rights 
under the shareholder agreement in relation to its St Edward Homes joint venture. 

In addition, the Company’s share schemes contain provisions which take effect upon change of control. These do not entitle the 
participants to a greater interest in the shares of the Company than that created by the initial grant of the award. The Company does not 
have any arrangements with any Director that provide compensation for loss of office or employment resulting from a takeover.  

The remaining information required to be disclosed under the Takeover Directive can be found within notes 5 and 18 to the consolidated 
financial statements. 

indePendent auditors and disclosure of information to auditors 

Each of the persons who is a Director at the date of approval of this Annual Report confirms that: 

•	 So far as the Director is aware, there is no relevant audit information of which the Company’s auditors are unaware; and 

•	 The Director has taken all the steps that he/she ought to have taken as a Director in order to make himself/herself aware of any relevant 

audit information and to establish that the Company’s auditors are aware of that information. 

This confirmation is given and should be interpreted in accordance with the provisions of Section 418 of the Companies Act 2006. 

A resolution to re-appoint PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP as auditors to the Company will be proposed at the Annual General Meeting. 

annual general meeting 

The Annual General Meeting of the Company is to be held at the Woodlands Park Hotel, Woodlands Lane, Stoke D’Abernon, Cobham, 
Surrey KT11 3QB at 11.00am on 5 September 2012. The Notice of Meeting, which is contained in a separate letter from the Group 
Chairman accompanying this report, includes a commentary on the business to be transacted at the Annual General Meeting. 

By order of the Board 

A M Bradshaw 
Company Secretary 
19 July 2012 

88  Berkeley Annual Report 2012 

GovernanceDIRECTORS’ REpORT	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	 	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
remuneratIon report 

The Board of Directors presents its Remuneration Report for the year ended 30 April 2012, which has been prepared on the 
recommendation of the Remuneration Committee (“the Committee”). An advisory resolution to approve this report will be proposed at 
the Annual General Meeting of the Company at which the financial statements will be approved. 

The report has been prepared in accordance with the requirements of the UK Corporate Governance Code, Schedule 8 of the Large & 
Medium-Sized Companies and Groups (Accounts and Reports) Regulations 2008, and the Listing Rules of the Financial Services Authority. 

IntroductIon 

This year’s remuneration report is set against the strong operational performance of Berkeley in both an historical context and also relative 
to the performance of its sector. 

Berkeley’s strategy places an emphasis on achieving two operational measures that the Committee aims to align to the Executive’s 
remuneration. The first is achieving sustainable pre-tax returns on shareholder equity (“ROE”). The second measure recognises that the ROE 
performance should not be achieved at the expense of shrinking the business and that a sustainable model for shareholders relies on growth 
in the value of the land bank at the same time. The combination of these two targets is designed to provide a balance between earnings in 
the near term and creating a long term, sustainable business which the Board considers is the best way to create shareholder value. 

In considering the level of the Executive’s Annual Bonus Plan the Committee has previously discussed the principles with major 
shareholders and aims to set these at a level that is both challenging and sector leading. Comparing the Group’s ROE to its sector over 
the last 5 years illustrates the relative performance of Berkeley and challenging targets set: 

30% 

20% 

10% 

0% 

-10% 

-20% 

-30% 

Berkeley ROE 
Sector average ROE 

2007/08 

2008/09 

2009/10 

2010/11 

2011/12 

The Committee believes it is important to set annual targets that have a strong operational correlation with the performance of the 
business and are targets that the Executive team are responsible for delivering. Whilst the Committee considers total shareholder return 
(TSR) to be a helpful tool to measure performance over the long term, it believes that setting the right operational targets on an annual 
basis and putting in place a long term share based remuneration policy aligned to creating shareholder value above a hurdle level of 
return is the best way to deliver value for shareholders and to encourage, reward and retain the current Executives. 

The absolute value delivered by Berkeley can be illustrated by the comparison of the TSR for Berkeley, expressed as the value of £100 
invested in the company, both from 25 June 2004, being the date on which the previous Scheme of Arrangement was announced, and 
from 1 May 2010, the date on which the current Annual Bonus Plan was introduced, to 30 April 2012: 

Company 

Berkeley 

FTSE 250 

FTSE 100 

Sector average 

Value of £100 invested on 

25/06/2004 

01/05/2010 

£321 

£234 

£169 

£84 

£154 

£117 

£111 

£111 

Over these timeframes, Berkeley has out-performed the sector average and generated additional value for shareholders over a difficult 
and challenging period. 

At the 2011 AGM shareholders approved the Board’s strategy to return £13 per share to shareholders over the next 10 years, which has 
the following key features: 

•	 It strikes the right balance between maximising shareholder returns and an acceptable level of operating risk; 

•	 It provides a long term framework which has embedded flexibility between investment and cash and takes into account the cyclical 

nature of the property market; 

•	 It allows Berkeley to operate at its natural size; 

•	 The model provides a performance stretch relative to the sector but remains within the range of management’s capacity to deliver; 

•	 It supports an added value model which the Board believes delivers best returns to shareholders over the long term; and 

•	 Berkeley can generate the returns without introducing unnecessary financial risk in a cyclical market which is an important part of 

Berkeley’s overall strategy. 

Berkeley Annual Report 2012

 89 

GovernanceGovernance 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	 	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	 	
	 	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	 	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	 	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	 	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
Key elements of the remuneratIon polIcy 

The objective of Berkeley’s remuneration policy is to encourage, reward and retain the current Executives. The core philosophies of the 
policy are: 

fixed remuneration 
The Committee sets salaries for the Executive Directors based on their experience, role, individual and corporate performance. Salaries on 
appointment to the Board are set at a lower quartile level which, based on appropriate levels of individual and corporate performance, 
will be increased with experience gained over time. 

annual performance related pay 
The Committee believes that shareholders’ interests are best served by remuneration packages that have a large emphasis on 
performance-related pay which encourage the Executives to focus on delivering the business strategy. 

The chart below summarises the relative importance of the various components of annual remuneration for each Executive Director for 
2011/12, illustrating that the majority of this remuneration is performance related: 

0% 

20% 

40% 

60% 

80% 

Fixed: 
Salary 

Benefits 

Pensions 

Performance related: 
Annual Bonus Plan 

A W Pidgley 

R C Perrins 

N G Simpkin 

G J Fry 

K Whiteman 

S Ellis 

100% 

The Committee is responsible for determining the performance measures, annual performance targets and bonus awards under the 

Annual Bonus Plan.
 

The specific performance measures under the Annual Bonus Plan, being a return based measure (Return on Equity) and a value based 
measure (Land Bank Growth) ensure that there is a balance between incentivising the Executives to provide a sustainable ongoing level of 
return to shareholders whilst ensuring the long-term sustainability of the Company, thereby creating long-term shareholder value. 

The performance targets are set on an annual basis taking into account the above considerations and reflecting an appropriate level of 
risk. It is not in the interests of any of the stakeholders in the Company to set targets that encourage a level of risk inconsistent with the 

agreed risk profile for the Company.
 

long-term sustainable performance 
The reward arrangements should be designed to incentivise and lock-in the Executive team to deliver the Company’s strategy and to 

ensure that they are focused on generating long-term sustainable value for shareholders. 


The long-term incentives which extend to 2021 have been designed to lock-in the Executive team for a far longer period than is typical in 
most publicly listed companies. This has helped ensure that the Executive team are focused on generating long-term sustainable value for 
shareholders rather than on meeting short term performance targets. 

The chart below sets out the proportion of annual to long term remuneration of the Executive Directors, illustrating that the significant 

element of total remuneration is aligned to the long-term performance of the Group:
 

0% 

10% 

20% 

30% 

40% 

50% 

60% 

70% 

80% 

90% 

100% 

Annual 

Long term 

A W Pidgley 

R C Perrins 

N G Simpkin 

G J Fry 

K Whiteman 

S Ellis 

90  Berkeley Annual Report 2012 

RemuneRation RepoRtGovernance	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
The Company’s long term incentive plans are designed to align the interests of shareholders and the Executive Directors over the long 
term. They are summarised below: 

2009 ltIp 
This was approved by shareholders at an EGM in April 2009, and incorporates two parts: 

a. Part A – replacing the balance of the shares originally awarded under the previous 2004(b) LTIP, exercisable on 31 January 2014 subject 

to continued employment with the Company and an exercise price of £3 per share 

b. Part B – requiring maintaining a minimum net asset per share of £5.94 over a six year period, vesting in two equal tranches on 15 April 

2015 and 2016 with an exercise price of £8.40 per share 

2011 ltIp 
This is a ten year plan introduced in September 2011 to support the Company’s long term plan to return £13 per share (approximately 
£1.7 billion), representing 183% of Net Assets at 30 April 2011, to shareholders by September 2021. This was approved by shareholders 
at the 2011 Annual General Meeting. 

The plan aims to maximise returns within a given level of risk, disciplining the business to make significant returns to shareholders in cash 
over a sustained period and ensuring the Group remains at the right size and balances investment and returns to shareholders. This model 
is aligned to Berkeley’s ability to add value and operate in a cyclical market. 

These plans are set out in more detail later in this report. 

risk adjustment 
The Company’s reward arrangements should contain the following elements of risk adjustment, in line with best practice: 

a. a focus on long-term sustainable performance – this is set out above. 

b. the weighting of the reward package towards building substantial equity holdings which the Executive team are required to earn and 

hold over long periods: 

– The final shares from the previous 2004(b) LTIP will not vest and sale restrictions be fully removed until 31 January 2014, ten years 


after awards were granted under the Plan.
 

– The 2009 LTIP provides longer than market standard vesting periods – for example options granted in 2009 under Part B of this Plan 
will vest 50% on 15 April 2015 and the balance on 15 April 2016 subject to the Net Asset Value per share being a minimum of £5.94 
at the first of these two dates. 

c. the deferral of a significant proportion of annual incentive awards and clawback where there is a material deterioration in performance: 

– The Annual Bonus Plan, whilst based on annual performance periods: 

• defers 50% of a rolling balance each year in notional shares until the final payments are made at the end of a five year period; and 

• ensures that 50% of these rolling balances are at material risk each year due to forfeiture if minimum threshold levels of performance 

set in each year are not achieved. 

d. no reward for failure: 

–	 Under the 2011 LTIP all options lapse, no shares vest and the LTIP terminates on 1 October 2015 if £4.34 per share has not been paid 

to shareholders by 30 September 2015. 

substantial equity holdings 
In order to align the interests of Executives and shareholders, the Committee believes that one of the most effective ways of doing this is 
to design the reward strategy so that, provided performance is delivered, the Executive team become material (in relation to their overall 
compensation) shareholders in the Company, which the Executive Directors are required to earn and hold over long periods. 

The current shareholdings of the Executive Directors as a percentage of salary, based on the share price at 30 April 2012, are set out on 
page 99 of this report. 

remuneratIon revIew 

The Committee reviews on an annual basis whether its remuneration policy remains appropriate for the relevant financial year. Factors 
taken into account by the Committee include: 

•	 market conditions affecting the Company; 

•	 the recruitment market in the Company’s sector, other comparable companies and the FTSE 250; 

•	 aligning remuneration to the corporate strategy and delivering value to shareholders by encouraging long-term sustainable 

performance; 

•	 changing market practice; and 

•	 changing views of institutional shareholders and their representative bodies and Corporate Governance best practice. 

There have been no changes to the policy following the review in the year, with the only changes to individual remuneration being in 
respect of the recent Executive appointments to the Board, where the policy is to align their basic salaries with market rate over time in 
line with increased experience on the Board. There are no salary changes proposed for the remaining Executive Directors on the Board. 

Berkeley Annual Report 2012

 91 

GovernanceGovernance  
  
 
  
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
	
	
		
	
	
	 	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	 	
	
	
	
	
	
		
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	 	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
   
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
remuneratIon commIttee 

composition and role 
At 30 April 2012, the Committee comprised of three Independent Non-executive Directors, Alan Coppin (Chairman), Sir John Armitt and 
David Howell. David Howell was appointed to the Committee on 2 December 2011 and Victoria Mitchell retired from the Committee on 
the same date. 

During the year the Committee met on four occasions and there were no absences. 


With effect from 13 June 2012 David Howell retired from the Committee and Glyn Barker was appointed to the Committee.
 

The members of the Committee have no personal financial interest other than as shareholders in matters to be decided, no potential 

conflicts of interest arising from cross directorships and no day-to-day involvement in running the business.
 

The Committee is able to seek independent advice at the expense of the Company; no advice has been sought by the Committee during
 
the year under review. 

In determining the Executive Directors’ remuneration for the year, the Committee consulted with the Group Chairman, Tony Pidgley, the 
Group Managing Director, Rob Perrins and the Group Finance Director, Nick Simpkin. No Director played a part in any discussion about 
his remuneration. In addition, the Committee had access to information on executive reward provided to the Board by 
PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP, who acquired Halliwell Consulting, the previous advisers, in December 2008 and who have extensive 
knowledge of the Group and its structure. 

The Executive Directors hold no external appointments. 

The key responsibilities of the Committee are to: 

•	 determine and agree with the Board the broad policy for the remuneration of the Executive Directors. This includes salary, annual bonus 

plans, share options, other share based incentives and pensions; 

•	 determine the performance targets for the Annual Bonus Plan operated by the company and approve the total annual payments made 

under this plan; 

•	 determine all share incentive plans for approval by the Board and shareholders; 

•	 take into account the views of shareholders when determining plans under the remuneration policy; 

•	 ensure that the contractual terms on termination, and any payments made, are fair to the individual and the Company and that failure is 

not rewarded; and 

•	 note annually the remuneration trends and any major changes in employee benefit structures across the Company or Group. 

The Committee has formal terms of reference which describes its full remit. This can be downloaded from the section dealing with 
Investor Relations on the Berkeley website (www.berkeleygroup.co.uk). 

remuneratIon polIcy for 2011/12 and 2012/13 

The 2011/12 financial year started on 1 May 2011 and finished on 30 April 2012.
 

The 2012/13 financial year started on 1 May 2012 and finishes on 30 April 2013.
 

The policy is to set the main elements of the Executive Directors’ remuneration package against the following quartiles in the Company’s 

comparator group:
 

Base salary	 

Annual bonus 

Pension 

Benefits in kind 

Share incentives
 

Experience and Role 

Upper decile 

Lower quartile 

Market practice 

Upper decile 

For the purposes of benchmarking remuneration the Committee used the following comparator group of companies in the year ended 30 
April 2012: 

Company name 

Amec Plc	 

Bellway plc 

Marshalls PLC 

Taylor Wimpey plc 

Balfour Beatty Plc 

Bovis Homes Group PLC  Persimmon Plc 

Travis Perkins Plc 

Barratt Developments PLC 

Carillion Plc 

Redrow plc 

The Committee also considers the remuneration in the FTSE 250 as an additional benchmark to the main comparator group set out above 
due to its relatively small number of constituent companies. 

92  Berkeley Annual Report 2012 

RemuneRation RepoRtGovernance	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Balance Between fIxed and varIaBle performance Based pay 

The charts below demonstrate the balance between fixed and variable performance based pay for each Executive for the 2011/12 
financial year on an annualised basis. 

A W Pidgley 
Chairman 

R C Perrins 
Group Managing 
Director 

N G Simpkin 
Group Finance 
Director 

G J Fry 
Divisional Director 

K Whiteman 
Divisional Director 

S Ellis 
Divisional Director 

10% 

11% 

15% 

16% 

19% 

20%

90% 

89% 

85% 

84% 

81% 

80%

KEY 
FIXED PERFORMANCE 
is calculated as: 
– Salary 
– Benefits (including pension 
contribution/allowance) 

VARIABLE PERFORMANCE
 
is calculated as: 

– Bonus earned 
– Fair value of LTIPs


 (annualised) 


elements of executIve dIrectors’ remuneratIon 

BasIc salary 

The Committee has historically set the salaries of some of the Executives at the upper decile against the Company’s comparator group 
reflecting the Committee’s view that Berkeley has one of the most experienced and capable Executive teams within the sector and that 
Executive Directors had been in their roles for a number of years.
 

The Committee believes that it is right to take account of the following factors in setting individual salary levels:
 

•	 the individual Executive Director’s experience and responsibilities; 

•	 the levels of base salary for similar positions with comparable status, responsibility and skills in organisations of broadly similar size and 

complexity, in particular those companies within the comparator group, other comparable companies and the FTSE 250; 

•	 the performance of the individual Executive Director and the Group; and 

•	 the pay and conditions throughout the Group. 

In applying its policy on appointment to the Board and promotion, the Committee sets salaries at a lower quartile level which, based on 
appropriate levels of individual and corporate performance, will be increased with experience gained over time. 

The salaries for 2012/13 are set out below: 

Executive 

A W Pidgley 

R C Perrins 

G J Fry 

N G Simpkin 

K Whiteman 

S Ellis 

2011/12 
Salary 

£780,000 

£470,000 

£325,000 

£270,000 

£270,000 

£270,000 

2012/2013 
Salary 

£780,000 

£470,000 

£325,000 

£312,000 

£305,000 

£305,000 

% rise 

0% 

0% 

0% 

16% 

13% 

13% 

Lower 
Quartile 

£371,000 

£402,000 

£246,000 

£270,000 

£246,000 

£246,000 

FTSE 250 

Median 

£478,000 

£487,000 

£310,500 

£318,750 

£310,500 

£310,500 

Upper 
Quartile 

£577,000 

£577,000 

£368,000 

£360,000 

£368,000 

£368,000 

The increases agreed by the Committee for Messrs Simpkin, Whiteman and Ellis reflect the Committee’s policy of increasing individual 
Director’s salaries over time to reflect their experience, performance and the performance of the Group. 

In respect of the other Executive Directors the Committee decided that, whilst there was a case for increasing their salaries due to their 
individual performance and the performance of the Group, no increases would be proposed in the current market. 

In reviewing the salaries of the Executive Directors, the Committee has also taken account of the employment conditions and salary 
increases awarded to employees throughout the Group, which were on average 4.4% this year. 

Berkeley Annual Report 2012

 93 

GovernanceGovernance	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
annual performance-related Bonus 

the Berkeley Group holdings plc Bonus plan 

overview of the Bonus plan 
•	 At the beginning of the plan period of five financial years, participants will have a plan account to which Company contributions 

will be made. 

•	 No Company contribution will be made to a participant’s plan account unless the annual performance criteria are met. 

•	 The Company contribution will be set annually as a percentage of salary for each Executive. 

•	 There will be two types of performance condition, Group and Divisional. The Group performance condition will be a matrix of Return on 
Equity (“ROE”) and Land Bank Growth. The Divisional performance condition will be based upon Divisional Profit before Tax (“PBT”). 

•	 Having regard to the strategy of the Company, the Committee will set: 

– the performance levels (including minimum performance thresholds) for the performance conditions for each plan year; and 

– the maximum annual Company contribution for each participant for the plan year. 

•	 These criteria will be disclosed in full in the relevant Committee report along with the annual contributions earned and deferred 

balances for each participant. 

•	 Where the minimum threshold performance criteria on both measures are not achieved, 50% of the deferred balance in a participant’s 

plan account will be forfeited. 

•	 Participants will be entitled to an annual payment of 50% of their plan account at the end of each financial year. All balances will be 

deferred in shares or notional shares. At the end of the five year plan period 100% of the balance of participants’ accounts will be paid. 

Key features of the Bonus plan 
The Committee designed the Bonus Plan based on the following rationale: 

Two targets – the Committee felt that the dynamic tension between operating a return based measure (“ROE”) and a value based 
measure (“Land Bank Growth”) should ensure that there was a balance between incentivising the Executives to provide a sustainable 
ongoing level of return to shareholders whilst ensuring the long-term sustainability of the Company. In the Committee’s opinion the 
impact of these two measures over the five year plan period should incentivise the Executives to ensure the creation of long-term 
shareholder value as follows: 

•	 the Bonus Plan incentivises the delivery of increased profits in order to achieve ROE at the same time as growing the land bank. It 

should be noted that the ROE will be set from a challenging base as the Company has not taken any land write downs as is the case 
with the majority of its competitors; 

•	 ROE is a compound measure and therefore if shareholder funds are reinvested and not paid as dividends, earnings growth will be 

compounded to achieve the targets; 

•	 the fact that the Bonus Plan targets also include growth in the land bank value, means that Executives are encouraged to acquire land in 

the current market on favourable terms as well as maximise sustainable profit growth; 

•	 the cash target in the previous bonus plan had the potential to restrict value creation. Longer term, ROE is aligned to shareholders’ 

interests and if the Company raises further equity in the future, the investment threshold is clearly set out; and 

•	 ROE as a measure highlights the inefficiency of retaining surplus cash on the balance sheet. In order to deliver the targeted level of 

returns, this will encourage the Company to invest or return cash to shareholders. 

Level of targets – the Committee wishes to incentivise the Executives to achieve a good level of returns to shareholders whilst ensuring 
the long-term sustainability of the Company. Therefore the targets set have to take into account an appropriate level of risk. It is not in the 
interests of any of the stakeholders in the Company to set targets that encourage a level of risk inconsistent with the agreed risk profile for 
the Company. The Bonus Plan allows a close tailoring by the Committee of the performance conditions to the budget and performance of 
the Company for each financial year. 

At the outset of the Plan, the Committee set the annual performance requirements targeting an average ROE of 12.5% p.a. and average 
Land Bank Growth of 10% p.a. over the full five years of the plan, which were considered challenging and stretching targets at that time. 

Over the course of the Plan there is likely to be annual variability in the performance requirements actually set to reflect the environment 
at the time the requirements are set (see performance targets for 2011/12 and 2012/13 operation of the plan set out below), and these 
will be reviewed each year by the Committee to ensure that they are appropriate to the current market conditions and position of the 
Company, so that they continue to remain challenging and fully aligned to the strategy of the Group. 

Level of awards – the proposed maximum award bonus potential is 300% of salary; however, because 50% of the balance on the plan 
account is deferred, the actual annual payment profile, based on, for these illustrative purposes, maximum awards each year and 100% 
satisfaction of both performance conditions, would be: 

Year 1 

150% 

Year 2 

225% 

Year 3 

262.5% 

Year 4 

281% 

Year 5 

581% 

94  Berkeley Annual Report 2012 

RemuneRation RepoRtGovernance	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	 	
	
	
	
	
	
	 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	 	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	 	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	 	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
		
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	 	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	 	
	
	
	
	 	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	 	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	 	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	 	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Risk adjustment – there is a risk adjustment mechanism built into the operation of the Bonus Plan with a claw back of contributions if the 
threshold levels of ROE and Land Bank Growth are not met for any financial year during the five years of operation of the Bonus Plan. This 
adjustment mechanism ensures: 

•	 performance must be maintained over the five years of operation of the Bonus Plan or the value in the participant’s plan account will not 

increase; and 

•	 if there is a material deterioration in performance there is a claw back of 50% of the balance of the participant’s account. 

Alignment of interests – there is a real alignment of participants’ interests with shareholders: 

•	 shareholders receive a minimum level of performance prior to any incentive payments to Executives; 

•	 Executives are encouraged to maximise consistent levels of performance (or lose through the risk adjustment mechanism); and 

•	 there is a long-term alignment with the interests of shareholders as the deferred elements of the Bonus Plan are in shares or notional 

shares. 

operation of the Bonus plan for the year ended 30 april 2012 
The bonus payable to each of the Group Chairman, Group Managing Director and Group Finance Director is determined by reference to 
the Group performance condition. For the Divisional Directors, 50% of the potential bonus payable is determined by reference to the 
Group performance condition and 50% by reference to the Divisional PBT performance condition. 

The maximum bonus potential for the year ended 30 April 2012 is set out in the table below: 

Information 

A W Pidgley 

R C Perrins 

N G Simpkin 

G J Fry 

K Whiteman 

S Ellis 

Maximum Potential (% age of Salary) 

300% 

300% 

220% 

154% 

175% 

175% 

The following tables set out: 

•	 the performance conditions for the Bonus Plan for the year ended 30 April 2012; 

•	 the level of satisfaction of those performance conditions. 

Group performance condition (year ended 30 april 2012) 

Performance Requirement Matrix 

Land Bank Growth 

Target 

<11.5% 

Target 

Factor 

<0% 

0.0% 

0%  Bonus Plan 
Deduction 

0% 

2% 

4% 

6% 

8% 

50.0% 

62.5% 

75.0% 

87.5% 

100.0% 

0% 

0% 

0% 

0% 

0% 

11.5% 

12.5% 

13.5% 

14.5% 

15.5% 

16.5% 

50% 

60% 

70% 

80% 

90% 

100% 

0% 

0% 

0% 

0% 

0% 

0% 

25% 

30% 

35% 

40% 

45% 

50% 

31% 

38% 

44% 

50% 

56% 

63% 

38% 

45% 

53% 

60% 

68% 

75% 

44% 

53% 

61% 

70% 

79% 

88% 

50% 

60% 

70% 

80% 

90% 

100% 

y
t
i
u
q
E
n
o
n
r
u
t
e
R

Notes: 

1 The matrix shows the percentage of each of the performance requirements for a given level of performance and the corresponding percentage of the 

targeted maximum annual bonus potential earned for 2011/12. 

2 There will be straight line bonus vesting between points. 

3 The matrix demonstrates the dynamic tension between the two performance conditions. One cannot be met at the expense of the other. If the minimum 

threshold levels for either are not met, no contribution is made to the Bonus Plan account. If the minimum threshold levels of performance are not met for 
both performance conditions, 50% of the participant’s plan account will be forfeited. Structuring the performance conditions in this way will ensure consist­
ent levels of ROE at the same time as the Group invests and adds value to the land bank. 

4 ROE is defined as profit before tax divided by average shareholders’ funds. 

5 Land Bank Growth is defined as the annual percentage increase in the development margin in the land bank. This is the anticipated future gross margin 
to be earned from plots controlled and included in the Group’s land bank. To be included in the land bank, management must have reasonable certainty 
that the plots will come forward for development, either benefiting from a planning consent or being on land zoned for development. For the avoidance of 
doubt, the land bank excludes plots subject to strategic land options. Calculated plot by plot, the development margin is measured on a consistent basis 
according to prevailing sales prices for revenue, historic cost for costs already incurred and prevailing prices for costs still to be incurred. It is separately dis­
closed within the annual report and the presentations to analysts. Each year the land bank gross margin is reduced naturally by the amount of gross margin 
sold in the year. Therefore, zero % growth in the land bank means that replacement matches usage. 

Berkeley Annual Report 2012

 95 

GovernanceGovernance	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	 	
	
	 	
	
	
	
	
	
	 	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	 	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	 	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
divisional pBt performance condition (year ended 30 april 2012) 
The Divisional PBT targets are set at the beginning of the financial year at a level which is challenging taking into account the potential 
level of bonus payments, the market, development availability and other relevant issues. 

level of satisfaction of performance conditions (year ended 30 april 2012) 

Group 

0.0% 

8.0% 

12.0% 

LAND BANK GROWTH

11.5% 

16.5% 

21.2%  ROE 

Threshold 

Maximum 

Out performance 

divisional 
The level of Divisional PBT performance for 2011/12 against target is as follows: 

Division 

St George 

Berkeley Homes Urban Renaissance 

St James Group 

Level of actual performance 
as a percentage of target

Percentage of bonus 
 element earned 

100% 

100% 

100% 

100% 

100% 

100% 

level of bonus earned in respect of the year ended 30 april 2012 
The Group performance conditions and Divisional performance conditions were met in full; therefore the maximum bonus potentials set 
out above were earned. It should be noted that under the Bonus Plan only 50% of the cumulative balance of a participant’s account is 
paid at the end of the relevant year with the balance deferred in shares. See page 103 of the audited section of the Report for details of 
the Plan accounts for each Executive Director. 

operation of the Bonus plan for year ending 30 april 2013 
The bonus payable to each of the Group Chairman, Group Managing Director and Group Finance Director is determined by reference to 
the Group performance condition. For the Divisional Directors, 50% of the potential bonus payable is determined by reference to the 
Group performance condition and 50% by reference to the Divisional PBT performance condition. 

The maximum bonus potential for the year ended 30 April 2013 is set out in the table below: 

Information 

A W Pidgley 

R C Perrins 

N G Simpkin 

G J Fry 

K Whiteman 

S Ellis 

Maximum Potential (% age of Salary) 

300% 

300% 

220% 

175% 

175% 

175% 

The performance conditions for the Bonus Plan for the year ending 30 April 2013 are set out below. 

Group performance condition (year ended 30 april 2013) 

Performance Requirement Matrix 

Land Bank Growth 

Target 

<13.5% 

Target 

Factor 

0% 

0.0% 

0%  Bonus Plan 
Deduction 

2% 

4% 

6% 

8% 

10% 

50.0% 

62.5% 

75.0% 

87.5% 

100.0% 

0% 

0% 

0% 

0% 

0% 

13.5% 

14.5% 

15.5% 

16.5% 

17.5% 

18.5% 

50% 

60% 

70% 

80% 

90% 

100% 

0% 

0% 

0% 

0% 

0% 

0% 

25% 

30% 

35% 

40% 

45% 

50% 

31% 

38% 

44% 

50% 

56% 

63% 

38% 

45% 

53% 

60% 

68% 

75% 

44% 

53% 

61% 

70% 

79% 

88% 

50% 

60% 

70% 

80% 

90% 

100% 

y
t
i
u
q
E
n
o
n
r
u
t
e
R

divisional pBt performance condition (year ended 30 april 2013) 
The Divisional PBT targets are set at the beginning of the financial year at a level which is challenging taking into account the potential 
level of bonus payments, the market, development availability and other relevant issues. 

96  Berkeley Annual Report 2012 

RemuneRation RepoRtGovernance 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
BenefIts In KInd 

In line with market practice, the Company’s policy is to provide Executive Directors with the following additional benefits: 

•	 a fully expensed company car or cash allowance alternative; and 

•	 medical insurance. 

pensIon 

Messrs Pidgley, Perrins and Whiteman receive payments in lieu of pension at 17%, 17% and 15% of base salary respectively. Messrs 
Simpkin, Fry and Ellis receive a 15% pension contribution. 

All payments in lieu of pension are subject to income tax and national insurance. These payments are not included in salary figures for the 
purposes of determining any other benefit entitlement. 

Full details of pension costs for Executive Directors are set out in the audited section of the report on page 103. 

lonG term remuneratIon 

This section of the report sets out the share incentives for the year ended 30 April 2012. 

On 15 April 2009, at an Extraordinary General Meeting of the Company, shareholders approved the introduction of The Berkeley Group 
Holdings plc 2009 Long-Term Incentive Plan, which incorporated and replaced Element 2 of The Berkeley Group Holdings plc 2004(b) 
Long-Term Incentive Plan (the “2004(b) LTIP”) and the previously approved 2007 LTIP, as set out below. 

2009 ltIp part a 
The balance of the shares originally awarded under the 2004(b) LTIP (i.e. 3/12 of the shares), totalling 5,330,340 shares, were replaced by 
options with an exercise price of £3 per share granted under the 2009 LTIP. This new option is identified as Part A of the 2009 LTIP. These 
options were awarded on 29 June 2009, at which time the Element 2 awards under the 2004 (b) LTIP were surrendered. 

Options will become exercisable on 31 January 2014 subject to the relevant Executive’s continued employment with the Company. 

888,390 options have subsequently been cancelled, as set out below. 

2009 ltIp part B 
Following shareholder approval on 15 April 2009, a maximum of 7,100,000 shares were capable of being granted under Part B of the 
2009 LTIP. The grants under Part B of the 2009 LTIP are market priced options which will vest subject to: 

•	 continued employment to the relevant vesting date; and 

•	 the satisfaction of the underpin condition that Net Assets Per Share are at least £5.94 at 15 April 2015. 

•	 Vesting of these options will be in two tranches: 

– 50% on 15 April 2015; and 
– 50% on 15 April 2016. 

A total of 6,830,000 options were granted, of which 500,000 have subsequently been cancelled, as set out below. 

Shareholder approval was received at the 2011 AGM to amend the rules of the 2009 LTIP so that the terms of existing options granted 
can be adjusted in the event of the payment of a cash dividend or dividend in specie. This provides that where such a dividend is paid the 
adjustment will be a reduction in the exercise price of an option by the amount or value of the dividend provided that the exercise price 
can never be less than zero and a reduction will only be made to the exercise price of an option that is not then capable of exercise. 

888,390 options under Part A and 500,000 options under Part B of the 2009 LTIP have been cancelled following the settlement agreed 
between the Company and Tony Carey, as follows: 

Plan 

2009 LTIP Part A 

2009 LTIP Part B Tranche 1 

2009 LTIP Part B Tranche 2 

Number of shares cancelled 

Exercise price 

Date first exercisable 

888,390 

250,000 

250,000 

£3.00 

£8.40 

£8.40 

31 January 2014 

15 April 2015 

15 April 2016 

2011 ltIp 
The Company announced in June 2011 as part of a strategic review of the business a long term plan to return £13 per share 
(approximately £1.7 billion) to shareholders over the next 10 years payable on or before the following milestones: 

30 September 2015 

30 September 2018 

30 September 2021 

Per share 

£4.34 

£4.33 

£4.33 

£13.00 

Berkeley Annual Report 2012

 97 

GovernanceGovernance	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
A new long term remuneration plan was proposed to support this strategy, the 2011 Long Term Incentive Plan (“2011 LTIP”), which was 
approved by shareholders at the Annual General Meeting in September 2011. 

The key features of the 2011 LTIP are: 

•	 if the Company returns £13/share to shareholders over a ten year period via a series of dividend payments by the milestone dates 
referred to above, participants will be entitled to exercise options and receive a number of ordinary shares in the capital of the 

Company at the end of the ten year period.
 

•	 the maximum number of shares capable of being earned by all participants are 19,616,503 shares, being 13% of the fully diluted share 

capital of the Company at the date of approval of the plan. These are set out by participant in the table below: 

Participant 

A W Pidgley 

R C Perrins 

N G Simpkin 

S Ellis 

K Whiteman 

G J Fry 

Total 

Position 

Chairman 

Group Managing Director 

Group Finance Director 

Divisional Director 

Divisional Director 

Divisional Director 

Number of shares subject to award 

5,000,000 

5,000,000 

3,250,000 

2,250,000 

2,250,000 

1,866,503 

19,616,503 

•	 the exercise price of options granted under the 2011 LTIP will be £13 per share less an amount equal to the value of all dividends paid 

between the date of approval of the 2011 LTIP and 30 September 2021, provided the exercise price cannot be less than zero. 

The following table sets out the cumulative dividend amounts, the relevant dates and the consequences of failing to deliver these 
amounts by these relevant dates: 

Required date 

Cumulative 
dividend 
(on or before 
required date) 

Consequences of failing to make the cumulative dividend payments on or before the  
required date 

30 September 2015 

£4.34 

Options lapse, no shares vest and 2011 LTIP terminates on 1 October 2015. 

30 September 2018 

£8.67 

Where the cumulative dividend paid on or before 30 September 2018 is less than £8.67, the 
following process determines the number of shares vesting:­

1 The number of shares capable of vesting is calculated on the level of dividend paid and 

capable of being paid as at 30 September 2018. 

2 The exercise price of the shares capable of vesting is set by reducing the original exercise 
price of £13 by the level of cumulative dividend actually paid on or before 30 September 
2021. 

3 No shares will vest until the end of the 2011 LTIP period on 30 September 2021 subject to 

the participant’s continued employment at this date. 

For example:­

A participant is granted an award over 3 million shares 

On 30 September 2018 it is determined that an additional £3 per share is capable of being paid as well as 
the actual payments made on or before 30 September 2015 of £4.34; giving a total of £7.34. 

Therefore the number of shares capable of vesting on 30 September 2021 is as follows:­

3 million shares x £7.34  = 1,693,846 shares 

£13 

with an exercise price initially per share of £8.66 (£13 - £4.34). 

If, however, the actual dividend payments made on or before 30 September 2021 exceed £4.34 the exercise 
price will be reduced to £13 minus the actual level of dividends paid. For example if the actual dividend 
paid was £10 the exercise price would reduce to £3 (£13 - £10). The number of shares capable of vesting 
would, however, remain unchanged with the balance incapable of vesting having lapsed on 1 October 2018. 

30 September 2021 

£13.00 

The process is the same as above with the relevant date being 30 September 2021. 

£13 paid in full prior  £13.00 
to 30 September 
2021 

In circumstances where £13 per share of dividend is paid prior to 30 September 2021 awards 
shall vest in full. 

Participants will be able to exercise their awards of options from the date the cumulative 
payment of dividend equals £13 a share and may also sell any shares necessary to pay their 
tax liability on exercise. 

In respect of the balance of their shares participants shall only be able to sell a maximum of 
10% p.a. of this balance until 30 September 2021 at which date the sale restrictions shall 
lapse. 

98  Berkeley Annual Report 2012 

RemuneRation RepoRtGovernance	 	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	 	
	
	
	
	 	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	 	
	
	
other senIor employees of the company 

The Company’s business comprises of a number of operating Divisions. The Committee in conjunction with the Board has, therefore, 
implemented both annual and longer term cash based compensation arrangements for these other senior employees of the Company 
linked to the performance of the relevant Division for which they work. Some elements of the cash bonus plans are annual while other 
elements are deferred to ensure long-term consistent delivery by each Division. The Committee, in line with best practice, continually 
reviews with the Board the policy behind the compensation plans at this level in the Company to ensure they remain appropriate to the 
market and the Company’s current circumstances. It is the view of both the Committee and the Board as a whole that these arrangements 
are very effective at ensuring the delivery of Divisional performance for which these senior employees are responsible. Both the 
Committee and the Board believe that having senior employees focused on the delivery of Divisional results is an excellent way of driving 
shareholder value. 

A number of senior employees of the Company have also been granted awards under the 2009 LTIP Part B. 

shareholdInG requIrement 

The Company has a shareholding requirement for both Executive and Non-executive Directors and these requirements and the actual 
shareholdings of the Executive and Non-executive Directors as at 30 April 2012 are set out in the following tables: 

Shareholder requirements  
as a % age of salary to be met within 
5 years of appointment 

Current shareholding   
as a % age of salary 
(based on 30 April 2012 share price) 

A W Pidgley 

R C Perrins  N G Simpkin 

G J Fry  K Whiteman 

S Ellis 

400% 

200% 

200% 

200% 

200% 

200% 

10,604% 

4,093% 

128% 

3,900%

 170% 

47% 

V M Mitchell 

J Armitt 

D Howell  A C Coppin 

A Nimmo 

G Barker 

V Wadley 

Shareholder requirements as a %  
age of net fees to be met within 
3 years of appointment 

Current shareholding   
as a % age of net fees 
(based on 30 April 2012 share price) 

dIlutIon 

100% 

100% 

100% 

100% 

100% 

100% 

100% 

419% 

252% 

131% 

131% 

88% 

345% 

– 

The 2009 LTIP and 2011 LTIP were special arrangements, approved by shareholders at the EGM in April 2009 and AGM in September 
2011 respectively. 

In considering dilution under the 2011 LTIP the Committee took account of the long term nature of the plan which extends beyond the 
length of normal incentive plans.  

In addition, the Committee took into account the significant priority returns of £13 per share (representing 183% of Net Assets at 30 April 
2011) that shareholders will receive from the plan over this 10 year period, with the actual value of the awards to the Executive Directors 
based on the ongoing value of the Group following this significant realisation of current value to the existing shareholders. 

Historically the Company has operated all its share plans within the ABI dilution limits. There has been no dilution other than under these 
special arrangements for the purposes of the ABI dilution limits in the year ended 30 April 2012. 

Berkeley Annual Report 2012

 99 

GovernanceGovernance 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
other remuneratIon matters 

all employee share plans 
The Company has regularly consulted widely with the management and individuals in its operating Divisions on whether it was 
appropriate to introduce all employee share plans. The consensus view remains that employees preferred the opportunity of receiving 
annual cash bonuses based on the performance of their respective Divisions rather than participate in a Group based all employee share 
plan. The Board, therefore, does not believe it is in shareholders’ interests to incur the income statement and dilutive cost of share 
arrangements which would not have the desired effect on employees. Accordingly the Company will continue to operate appropriate 
annual bonus arrangements in all of its Divisions. 

non-executive directors’ fees 
All Non-executive Directors have specific terms of engagement and their remuneration is determined by the Board within the limits set by 
the Articles of Association. The following table sets out the fee rates for the Non-executive Directors in the year ended 30 April 2012 and 
those rates which will apply in the year ending 30 April 2013: 

V M Mitchell 

J Armitt 

D Howell  A C Coppin 

A Nimmo 

G Barker 

V Wadley 

Total Fee Rates 2012/13 

£100,000 

£80,000 

£67,500 

£67,500 

£55,000 

£55,000 

£55,000 

Total Fee Rates 2011/12 

£100,000 

£80,000 (1) 

£67,500 

£67,500 

£50,000 (1) 

£50,000 (1) 

£50,000 (1) 

% Increase 

0% 

0% 

0% 

0% 

10% 

10% 

10% 

Breakdown of 2012/13 Fee 

Basic Fee 

£100,000 (2) 

£67,500 (3) 

£55,000 

£55,000 

£55,000 

£55,000 

£55,000 

Chair of Committee Fee 

– 

£12,500 

£12,500 

£12,500 

Committee Chair 

–  Sustainability 
and Health 
& Safety 

Audit  Remuneration 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

(1) Where Directors joined during the year or assumed additional responsibilities, fees have been annualised to allow a direct comparison 

(2) Victoria Mitchell’s basic fee reflects her role as Deputy Chairman of the Board.  She has announced her intention to stand down from the Board at 

the AGM on 5 September 2012 

(3) Sir John Armitt’s basic fee reflects his role as Senior Independent Director. Subject to re-election at the 2012 AGM, he will become Deputy Chairman 

of the Board from that date and his total fees will increase accordingly to £100,000 per annum 

The Board reviews the fees of the Non-executive Directors annually taking into account the following factors: 

•	 the workload and level of responsibility of the Non-executive Directors under the changing corporate governance expectations of 

shareholders and their representative bodies; and 

•	 the current market rate for fees for Non-executive Directors. 

The basic fee for the new Non-executive Directors for 2012/13 has been increased to the basic fee level for the existing  
Non-executive Directors. 

Non-executive Directors cannot participate in any of the Company’s share incentive plans or performance based plans and are not  
eligible to join the Company’s pension scheme. 

executIve dIrectors’ contracts 

The policy on termination is that the Company does not make payments beyond its contractual obligations. The only event on the 
occurrence of which the Company is potentially liable to make a payment to any of the Executive Directors is on cessation of 
employment; with the maximum payment being 12 months salary. No payment is due on either a Company takeover or in the event of 
liquidation. In addition, Executive Directors will be expected to mitigate their loss. Further, the Committee ensures that there have been 
no unjustified payments for failure. None of the Executive Directors’ contracts provides for liquidated damages. There are no special 
provisions contained in any of the Executive Directors’ contracts which provide for longer periods of notice on a change of control of the 
Company. Further, there are no special provisions providing for additional compensation on an Executive Director’s cessation of 
employment with the Company. 

The Company settled the litigation brought by Tony Carey against The Berkeley Group plc, St George PLC and other parties for age 
discrimination and unfair dismissal for £5 million prior to the year end and shortly before the commencement of a three week hearing in 
the Employment Tribunal. The Board’s decision to settle was unanimous having regard to legal advice, the size of the claim and the 
inevitable diversion of resources to run the action. Following the settlement, option rights over 1,388,390 shares, being 888,390 options 
under Part A and 500,000 options under Part B of the 2009 LTIP, have been cancelled. 

100  Berkeley Annual Report 2012 

RemuneRation RepoRtGovernance 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
		
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
		
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	 
			
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
		
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	 	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
non-executIve dIrectors’ aGreements 

All Non-executive appointments are subject to a notice period of one month and are subject to the provisions of the Articles of 
Association dealing with appointment and rotation every three years, however in accordance with the UK Corporate Governance Code 
are subject to annual re-election. All letters of appointment for Non-executive Directors are renewable annually on 1 May. 

Further details of all Directors’ contracts are summarised below: 

Notice 
period by 
Unexpired  Company or 
Director 

term 

Potential 
termination 
payment 

Date of 
contract 

Potential 
payment 
upon 
Company 
takeover 

Potential 
payment in 
event of 
liquidation 

24 June 1994  1 Year Rolling 

12 months 

12 months 

15 July 2002  1 Year Rolling 

12 months 

12 months 

11 September 2002  1 Year Rolling 

12 months 

12 months 

27 June 1996  1 Year Rolling 

12 months 

12 months 

15 January 1996  1 Year Rolling 

12 months 

12 months 

5 May 2004  1 Year Rolling 

12 months 

12 months 

1 May 2002 

24 February 2004 

1 September 2006 

1 October 2007 

5 September 2011 

3 January 2012 

3 January 2012 

n/a 

n/a 

n/a 

n/a 

n/a 

n/a 

n/a 

1 month 

1 month 

1 month 

1 month 

1 month 

1 month 

1 month 

1 month 

1 month 

1 month 

1 month 

1 month 

1 month 

1 month 

Nil 

Nil 

Nil 

Nil 

Nil 

Nil 

Nil 

Nil 

Nil 

Nil 

Nil 

Nil 

Nil 

Nil 

Nil 

Nil 

Nil 

Nil 

Nil 

Nil 

Nil 

Nil 

Nil 

Nil 

Nil 

Nil 

Directors 

Executive Directors 

A W Pidgley 

R C Perrins 

N G Simpkin 

G J Fry 

K Whiteman 

S Ellis 

Non-executive Directors 

V M Mitchell 

D Howell 

A C Coppin 

J Armitt 

A Nimmo 

G Barker 

V Wadley 

performance Graph 

As required by the Large and Medium-sized Companies and Groups (Account and Reports) Regulations 2008, the graph below shows the 
Company’s performance, measured by total shareholder return (“TSR”), compared with the performance of the FTSE250, the FTSE All 
Share and the Company’s remuneration comparator group (as set out on page 92). The Company considers these the most relevant 
indices for total shareholder return disclosure required under these Regulations. 

total shareholder return from april 30 2007 (%) 

20 

10 

0 

-10 

-20 

-30 

-40 

-50 

-60 

Berkeley Group 
Holdings plc 

FTSE 250 index 

FTSE all share index 

Comparator group 

2007 

2008 

2009 

2010 

2011 

2012 

(1) Total shareholder return (“TSR”) is a measure showing the return on investing in one share of the Company over the measurement period (the return is the 
value of the capital gain and reinvested dividends). This calculation is then carried out for the relevant Indices and constituents of the comparator group. 

Berkeley Annual Report 2012

 101 

GovernanceGovernance 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
The following tables and accompanying notes constitute the auditable part of the Remuneration Report as defined in Part 3, Schedule 8 
of the Companies Act 2006. 

dIrectors’ remuneratIon 

The remuneration of the Directors of the Company for the year is as follows: 

Chairman 

A W Pidgley 

Executive Directors 

R C Perrins 

N G Simpkin 

K Whiteman 

S Ellis (1) 

G J Fry (2) 

Non-executive Directors 

V M Mitchell

J A Armitt

A Coppin 

D Howell 

A Nimmo (3) 

G Barker (4)

V Wadley (4) 

Former Directors 

A Carey (5)

Salary/fees 
£ 

Earned  Payment in lieu 
 of pension (7)
bonus (6)
£ 
£ 

Benefits 
 in kind (8) 
£ 

2012
Total 
£ 

 2011 
 Total 
£ 

780,000 

2,340,000 

132,600 

37,128 

3,289,728 

3,157,639 

470,000 

1,410,000 

79,900 

29,160 

1,989,060 

1,901,419 

270,000 

270,000 

270,000 

212,227 

 100,000 

 72,708 

67,500 

67,500 

33,013 

 16,667 

16,667 

 – 

594,000 

472,500 

472,500 

326,503 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

–

– 

– 

– 

40,500 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

 – 

– 

– 

20,519 

22,103 

25,155 

19,679 

884,519 

805,103 

767,655 

558,409 

827,631 

745,815 

453,540 

114,486 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

100,000 

100,000 

72,708 

67,500 

67,500 

33,013 

16,667 

16,667 

65,000 

65,000 

65,000 

– 

– 

– 

– 

663,582 

2,646,282 

5,615,503 

253,000 

153,744

 8,668,529 

8,159,112 

(1) Appointed to the Board on 8 September 2010. 

(2) Resigned from the Board on 8 September 2010, reappointed to the Board on 5 September 2011. 

(3) Appointed to the Board on 5 September 2011. 

(4) Appointed to the Board on 3 January 2012. 

(5) Left the Board on 16 September 2010. The Company settled the litigation with Tony Carey during the year, as set out on page 100. 

(6) The earned bonus for the year is added to each individual Director’s plan account. 50% of the balance on the plan account at the end of the financial year 
is released and 50% deferred. The plan is set out in the table below. Before its award Rob Perrins, Nick Simpkin and Sean Ellis each sacrificed part of the 
released element of their bonus entitlement. Pension contributions equal to the amounts given up were made into pension plans for the benefit of their 
dependants. The amount shown in the bonus column reflects the full 2011/12 award. 

(7) Having regard to the Lifetime Allowance introduced under the pension simplification legislation which came into force from 6 April 2006, Executive 
Directors may, as an alternative to receiving a company contribution into a pension arrangement, receive a cash payment in lieu of such pension 
contributions. Tony Pidgley, Rob Perrins and Karl Whiteman have chosen this alternative in respect of their total pension entitlement from the Company. 
During the year Tony Pidgley and Rob Perrins received payments in lieu of pension at 17% of base salary and Karl Whiteman at 15% of base salary. 

(8) Benefits in kind for the current Chairman and Executive Directors relate principally to the provision of a fully expensed motor vehicle or cash allowance 

alternative and private healthcare. 

Where Directors were appointed, or resigned, during the year, the figures in the table relate only to the time when the relevant Director 
was a Main Board Director. 

102  Berkeley Annual Report 2012 

RemuneRation RepoRtGovernance 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
Bonus earned but deferred under the Bonus Banking plan 
Under the Bonus Plan, the earned bonus for the year is added to each individual Director’s plan account. 50% of the balance on the plan 
account at the end of the financial year is released and 50% deferred. 

The deferred balances on each Director’s plan account are set out below: 

Plan account 
brought forward 
Shares 

Plan account
brought forward (1) 
£ 

Contribution into 
plan account for 
 the financial year 
2011/12
£ 

Plan account 
balance at 
 30 April 2012
£ 

Amount 
released as of 
 30 April 2012 
£ 

Plan account 

Plan account 
carried forward  carried forward (1) 
Shares 

£ 

A W Pidgley

 106,132 

1,359,551 

2,340,000 

3,699,551 

(1,849,775)

 1,849,775 

144,401 

R C Perrins

N G Simpkin

K Whiteman

S Ellis

G J Fry

 63,679 

 25,943 

 20,637 

 20,637 (2)

 23,585 (3)

815,728 

332,330 

264,360 

 264,360 

 302,124 

1,410,000 

2,225,728 

(1,112,864)

 1,112,864 

594,000 

472,500 

472,500 

926,330 

736,860 

736,860 

500,000 (4)

 802,124 

(463,165)

(368,430)

(368,430)

(401,062)

 463,165 

 368,430 

 368,430 

 401,062 

86,875 

36,157 

28,761 

28,761 

31,309 

260,613 

3,338,453 

5,789,000 

9,127,453 

(4,563,726)

 4,563,726 

356,264 

(1) Based on the share price of £12.81 at 30 April 2012 

(2) Includes 7,350 shares representing deferred bonus earned prior to joining the Main Board on 8 September 2010 

(3) Shares represent deferred bonus earned for prior year 

(4) Bonus earned for full year including pro rata element earned prior to joining the Main Board on 5 September 2011 

pensIons 

payments in lieu of pension 
Tony Pidgley, Rob Perrins and Karl Whiteman received payments in lieu of a pension contribution from the Company during the year and 
this is set out in the Directors’ remuneration table above. 

No amounts were paid into pension arrangements in respect of Tony Pidgley, Rob Perrins and Karl Whiteman during the year ended 30 
April 2012. 

defined contribution plan 
In respect of Nick Simpkin, Sean Ellis and Greg Fry the following contributions were made to defined contribution plans:

Executive Directors 

N G Simpkin (1)

S Ellis (2)

G J Fry (3)

Former Directors 

A Carey (4)

 Company 
contributions 
2012 
£ 

Company 
contributions 
2011 
£ 

40,500 

40,500 

31,834 

– 

112,834 

30,000 

17,770 

15,612 

23,135 

86,517 

Age

 42 

 43 

 55 

 64 

Where Directors were appointed, or resigned, during the year, the figures in the table relate only to the time when the relevant Director 
was a Main Board Director. 

(1) In 2011 Nick Simpkin received 3% of base salary as a cash payment in lieu, in addition to pension contributions of 12%. 

(2) Appointed to the Board on 8 September 2010. 

(3) Resigned from the Board on 8 September 2010, reappointed to the Board on 5 September 2011. 

(4) Left the Board on 16 September 2010. 

Berkeley Annual Report 2012

 103 

GovernanceGovernance 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
share IncentIve plans 

The entitlements under share incentive plans for Directors serving on the Main Board at 30 April 2012 are set out below: 

At 1 May 
2011 
Options (1)

2,842,848 

 1,500,000 

 – 

1,066,068 

750,000 

– 

250,000 

– 

250,000 

– 

175,000 

– 

533,034 

500,000 

– 

4,441,950 

 3,425,000 

– 

Options 
vested 
 in year

Options 
granted 
 in year (2) 

At 30 April 
2012 
Options 

Value 
released 
£ 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

-

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

5,000,000 

– 

– 

2,842,848 

1,500,000 

5,000,000 

– 

1,066,068 

750,000 

5,000,000 

5,000,000 

– 

– 

250,000 

3,250,000 

3,250,000 

– 

– 

250,000 

2,250,000 

2,250,000 

– 

– 

175,000 

2,250,000 

2,250,000 

– 

533,034 

500,000 

– 

– 

1,866,503 

1,866,503 

– 

4,441,950 

3,425,000 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

19,616,503 

19,616,503 

– 

A W Pidgley 

2009 LTIP Part A (3) 

2009 LTIP Part B (4)

2011 LTIP (5)

R C Perrins 

2009 LTIP Part A (3) 

2009 LTIP Part B (4) 

2011 LTIP (5) 

N G Simpkin 

2009 LTIP Part B (4) 

2011 LTIP (5) 

K Whiteman 

2009 LTIP Part B (4) 

2011 LTIP (5) 

S Ellis 

2009 LTIP Part B (4) 

2011 LTIP (5) 

G J Fry (6) 

2009 LTIP Part A (3) 

2009 LTIP Part B (4) 

2011 LTIP (5) 

Total 

2009 LTIP Part A (3) 

2009 LTIP Part B (4)

2011 LTIP (5) 

(1) Or date of joining the Board if later. 

(2) On 5 September 2011. 

(3) Exercise price of £3.00 per share. 

(4) Exercise price of £8.40 per share. 

(5) Exercise price of £13.00 per share. 

(6) Appointed to the Board on 5 September 2011. 

Further details are set out on pages 97 and 98 of this report.
 

The mid-market share price of the Company at 5 September 2011, when the LTIP awards were made, was 1236p.
 

The mid-market share price of the Company was 1091p as at 3 May 2011 and was 1281p at 30 April 2012. The mid-market high and low 

share prices of the Company were 1414p and 1025p respectively in the year.
 

104  Berkeley Annual Report 2012 

RemuneRation RepoRtGovernance 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
dIrectors’ Interests In shares 

The beneficial interests (unless indicated otherwise) of the Directors in office at the end of the year in the ordinary share capital of the 
Company were as shown below. 

Name 

A W Pidgley 

A W Pidgley Non-beneficial 

R C Perrins 

N G Simpkin 

G J Fry (1) 

K Whiteman 

S Ellis 

V M Mitchell 

J Armitt 

D Howell 

A C Coppin 

A Nimmo (1) 

G Barker (2) 

V Wadley (2) 

1 May 
2011 

30 April 
2012 

6,756,838 

6,456,838 

19,183 

19,183 

1,688,346 

1,501,596 

27,000 

27,000 

943,171 

989,454 

31,126 

5,000 

16,274 

4,090 

4,000 

4,000 

– 

– 

– 

35,815 

10,000 

18,974 

9,112 

4,000 

4,000 

2,000 

7,800 

– 

(1) On appointment to the Board on 5 September 2011. 

(2) On appointment to the Board on 3 January 2012. 

In respect of shares previously released under Element 1 of the 2004 (b) LTIP, the restriction on the ability of the Executive Directors to sell 
a maximum of 10% of the net award of shares released each financial year continues until 31 January 2014 at which point the sale 
restrictions lapse. 

a c coppin 

chairman, remuneration committee 
19 July 2012 

Berkeley Annual Report 2012

 105 

GovernanceGovernance 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
        
corporate Governance
 

The Company is committed to maintaining a high standard of corporate governance in respect of leadership, effectiveness, accountability, 

remuneration and relationships with our shareholders as identified by the UK Corporate Governance Code 2010 (the Code).
 

This section and the Remuneration Report detail how the Company has applied the principles and provisions of the Code. The Company’s 

business model is explained on pages 12 to 15 of the Annual Report.
 

It is the Board’s view that it has been fully compliant with the Code throughout the 2011/12 financial year.
 

A copy of the Code is available on the Financial Reporting Council’s website www.frc.org.uk.
 

the Board 

role 
The Board has a collective responsibility for promoting the long term success of the Company in a safe and sustainable manner in order to 
create shareholder value. The Board provides leadership and sets the Company’s strategic long-term objectives. 

Its duties are set out in a formal schedule of matters specifically reserved for decision by the Board, which include: 

–	 Overall management of the Group, its strategy and long-term objectives;
 

–	 Approval of corporate plans;
 

–	 Approval of all corporate transactions;
 

–	 Changes to the Group’s capital structure;
 

–	 Approval of the Group’s treasury policy;
 

–	 Approval of the Group’s interim and annual results, dividend policy and shareholder distributions;
 

–	 Reviewing the Group’s risks and system of internal control;
 

–	 Changes to the Board and other senior executive roles;
 

–	 Corporate Governance arrangements and the Board evaluation; and
 

–  Approval of policies in key areas including Sustainability, Health & Safety and Business Ethics. 

composition and Independence 
At the date of this report the Board comprises thirteen Directors; the Chairman, five Executive Directors and seven independent 
Non-executive Directors. Their biographies are set out on pages 84 and 85. 

The Board has evolved over recent years to put in place the succession planning that all successful organisations require and the further 
appointments made to the Board during this year, including three new independent Non-executive Directors, has further broadened the 
overall composition of the Board. 

The Board considers that all of the current Non-executive Directors were independent throughout the year. In recognising that Victoria 
Mitchell was appointed to the Board on 1 May 2002 and as a result has served on the Board for over nine years, she announced in 
December 2011 her intention to step down from the Board at the Annual General Meeting on 5 September 2012. 

The Non-executive Directors, led by the Senior Independent Director Sir John Armitt have the skills, experience, independence and 
knowledge of the Company to enable them to discharge their respective duties and responsibilities effectively. 

The Group Executive Directors do not hold any Non-executive Director appointments or commitments required to be disclosed under  
the Code. 

chairman and managing director 
The roles of Group Chairman and Group Managing Director are separately held and there are clear written guidelines to support the 
division of responsibility between them. The Group Chairman is responsible for the effective conduct of the Board and shareholder 
meetings and for ensuring that each Director contributes to effective decision-making. The Group Managing Director has day-to-day 
executive responsibility for the running of the Group’s businesses. His role is to develop and deliver the strategy to enable the Group to 
meet its objectives. 

meetings 
The Board met seven times during 2011/12, including the April 2011 meeting which was deferred until the first week of May due to the 
unusually high number of public holidays in April 2011. There were no absences from any of the meetings. 

In addition to the formal meetings of the whole Board, the Non-executive Directors meet with the Group Chairman. The Group Managing 
Director and Group Finance Director are invited to attend these meetings in part, to provide an update on the business activities of the Group. 
The Non-executive Directors meet at least annually without the Group Chairman present, chaired by the Senior Independent Director. 

Board papers and agendas are sent out in the week prior to each meeting, thus allowing sufficient time for detailed review and consideration 
of the documents beforehand. In addition, the Board is supplied with comprehensive management information on a regular basis. 

election and re-election of directors 
The Articles of Association of the Company include the requirement for Directors to submit themselves to shareholders for re-election 
every three years. In addition, all Directors are subject to re-election by shareholders at the first opportunity after their appointment and 
thereafter at intervals of no more than three years. 

106  Berkeley Annual Report 2012 

Governance	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
However, in accordance with the requirements of the new Code, all the Directors will offer themselves for re-election at the forthcoming 
Annual General Meeting, other than Victoria Mitchell who is standing down from the Board. 

Induction and development 
On appointment, Non-executive Directors are provided with a detailed induction programme. This covers an overview of the Group’s 
operations and its policies, corporate responsibility and corporate affairs issues, legal matters, and the opportunity to meet with Directors 
and key staff and to visit the Group’s sites. 

No training needs were identified this year, although ongoing training is available to all Directors to meet their individual needs. Board 
members also receive guidance on regulatory matters and the corporate governance framework that the Group operates under. In 
particular during the year the Board received training on the Bribery Act 2010 in advance of its implementation on 1 July 2011. 

Members of the Audit and Remuneration Committees received briefings from our auditors and remuneration advisers respectively to 
ensure they remain up to date with current regulations and developments. 

All Directors have access to advice from the Company Secretary and independent professional advisers, at the Company’s expense, where 
specific expertise is required in the course of their duties. 

Board evaluation 
The Board undertakes an annual formal evaluation of its own performance and that of its Committees and individual Directors. 

This year the process was led by the Chairman and covered: 

•	 strategic matters 

•	 Board structure, committees and their operation 

•	 succession planning 

•	 induction and development 

•	 assessment of the performance of individual committees and the Chairman 

•	 shareholder communication 

The overall conclusion was that individual Board members are satisfied that the Board works well and operates efficiently. They are also 
satisfied with the contribution made by their colleagues and that the Board committees operate properly and efficiently. 

In line with the best practice recommendations of the Code, which recommends that an externally facilitated evaluation should be 
conducted at least every three years, the Board has agreed that an external evaluation will be conducted for 2012/13. 

conflicts of Interest 
In accordance with the Companies Act 2006, the Company’s Articles of Association allow the Board to authorise potential conflicts of 
interest that may arise and to impose such limits or conditions as it thinks fit. The decision to authorise a conflict of interest can only be 
made by non-conflicted Directors (those who have no interest in the matter being considered) and in making such a decision the Directors 
must act in a way they consider in good faith will be most likely to promote the Company’s success. 

The Company has established a procedure whereby actual and potential conflicts of interest of current and proposed roles to be 
undertaken by the Board with other organisations are regularly reviewed in respect of both the nature of those roles, and their time 
commitment, and for proper authorisation to be sought prior to the appointment of any new Director. The Board consider these 
procedures to be working effectively. 

Insurance 
The Company has in place an appropriate policy which insures Directors against certain liabilities, including legal costs, which they may 
incur in carrying out their duties. 

Board commIttees 

The Board has delegated certain matters to individual Executives and to specific committees of the Board. The responsibilities of the key 
Board committees are described below. 

executive committee 
The Executive Committee meets monthly and reviews the financial and operating performance of all Group divisions and companies. The 
Group Managing Director, Rob Perrins, chairs this Committee and other members comprise, Tony Pidgley, Nick Simpkin, Karl Whiteman, 
Sean Ellis and Greg Fry. 

The following three Board committees operate within clearly defined Terms of Reference pursuant to the provisions of the Code. The Terms 
of Reference can be downloaded from the section dealing with Investor Relations on the Berkeley website (www.berkeleygroup.co.uk). 
Copies are also available to shareholders on application to the Company Secretary. 

audit committee 
The Audit Committee comprises three independent Non-executive Directors. The Committee is chaired by David Howell, FCA, and the 
other members at 30 April 2012 were Alan Coppin and Alison Nimmo. 

During the year Alison Nimmo was appointed to the Committee on her appointment as a Non-executive Director on 5 September 2011 
and Victoria Mitchell retired from the Committee on 2 December 2011. 

Berkeley Annual Report 2012

 107 

GovernanceGovernance	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	 	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	 	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	 	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
corporate Governance
 

David Howell, who qualified as a chartered accountant in 1971 and was the Chief Financial Officer and a Main Board Director of 
lastminute.com plc until March 2005, is considered by the Board to have recent and relevant financial experience. David Howell was also 
Chairman of the Audit Committee of Nestor Healthcare Group plc from 2000 to 2003. 

The Committee met formally on three occasions during the year to 30 April 2012 with no absences. 

The Group Finance Director and representatives of the external and internal auditors also attend the Committee’s meetings by invitation. 

The Committee has formal Terms of Reference which set out its role and the authority delegated to it by the Board. The key 
responsibilities of the Committee are set out below: 

•	 monitoring the integrity of the financial reporting of the Company and reviewing significant financial reporting issues and 

accounting policies; 

•	 reviewing the adequacy and effectiveness of the Group’s internal control and risk management systems and monitoring the 

effectiveness of the Group’s internal audit function; and 

•	 overseeing the relationship with the external auditor, including appointment, removal and fees, and ensuring the auditor’s 

independence and the effectiveness of the audit process. 

The Committee met its responsibilities in the year by: 

•	 reviewing the financial disclosures in the Group’s Annual Report and Accounts and half-year financial report prior to their publication. 

This included reviewing the accounting policies and financial reporting judgements. It also reviewed the contents of interim 
management statements issued by the Company during the year; 

•	 undertaking an annual assessment of the Group’s system of risk management and internal control, including: 

– considering the key risks facing the Group 

– considering the key elements of the Group’s control processes 

– receiving reports from both external and internal audit during the course of the year 

– reviewing the operations and effectiveness of internal audit 

– assessing the adequacy of disclosure in the Annual Report 

•	 reviewing the development and implementation of the Group’s policies and procedures in relation to the Bribery Act, and monitoring 

ongoing compliance; 

•	 reviewing the external auditors audit plan, their performance, effectiveness, independence and fees; and 

•	 approving the non-audit fees policy. 

The Committee has a policy on the use of the auditors for non-audit services in order to safeguard auditor independence, which was 
reviewed during the year and the Committee has agreed to undertake actions, such as extending the use of other advisors who have the 
necessary skills and expertise, to target an equal ratio of audit to non-audit fees going forwards. At the same time, the Committee 
recognises that, for businesses such as Berkeley, the impact of one-off transactions can have a material effect on this ratio depending on  
the nature of such activity. 

Any departure from this ratio will only be as a consequence of transactional work, where the Committee considers it is right for the 
auditors to undertake such work where the reasons for doing so are compelling, such as where 

i)	 it is proprietary to them;
 

ii)	 they have pre-existing knowledge and experience that precludes the use of alternative firms;
 

iii)the nature of the transaction is that the Group’s auditors are the only practical solution. 

Non-audit work carried out by all firms, including the auditors, is formally reported to the Audit Committee at each meeting. 

The auditors have open recourse to the Non-executive Directors, should they consider it necessary, and there is open dialogue between 
the auditors and the Chairman of the Audit Committee before each Audit Committee meeting and, after the meeting, the opportunity to 
meet without the Executive Directors present. 

remuneration committee 
The Remuneration Committee is responsible for determining the Company’s policy for Executive remuneration and the precise terms of 
employment and remuneration of the Executive Directors. The principles and details of Directors’ remuneration are contained in the 
Remuneration Report on pages 89 to 105. 

The Committee is chaired by Alan Coppin and the other members at 30 April 2012 were Sir John Armitt and David Howell, who are all 
independent Non-executive Directors.  

During the year David Howell was appointed to the Committee on 2 December 2011 and Victoria Mitchell retired from the Committee on 
the same date. 

With effect from 13 June 2012, David Howell retired from the Committee and Glyn Barker was appointed to the Committee. 

The Committee met formally on four occasions during the year to April 2012 with no absences. 

No Director is involved in deciding his or her remuneration. The Executive Directors decide the remuneration of the Non-executive 
Directors and the Committee takes into consideration the recommendations of the Group Managing Director and Group Finance Director 
regarding the remuneration of their Executive colleagues. 

108  Berkeley Annual Report 2012 

Governance	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
nomination committee 
The Nomination Committee ensures that the membership and composition of the Board, including the balance of skills, is appropriate, as 
well as giving full consideration to succession planning on a regular basis. 

The Committee is chaired by the Group Chairman, Tony Pidgley and the Independent Non-executive members at 30 April 2012 were 
David Howell and Sir John Armitt. Victoria Mitchell retired from the Committee on 2 December 2011. 

With effect from 13 June 2012, Veronica Wadley was appointed to the Committee. 

The Committee met formally on two occasions during the year to 30 April 2012 with no absences. 

During the year, the activities of the Committee included: 

•	 identifying three new independent Non-executive Directors (Alison Nimmo, Veronica Wadley and Glyn Barker) and recommending their 

appointment to the Board; 

•	 considering and making recommendations to the Board regarding the membership of the Board committees; and 

•	 reviewing succession plans for the Executive team. 

Appointments to the Board are made based on merit and the specific skills and expertise required for the role. The Committee has chosen 
not to set specific representation targets for women at Board level at this time. However, it recognises that the benefits of diversity, 
including gender diversity, will continue to be an active consideration when further changes to the Board’s composition are considered. 

The process for identifying and recommending new appointments includes a combination of discussions and consultations, in addition to 
formal interviews, utilising the services of independent recruitment specialists, as appropriate. 

Key rIsKs and Internal control 

The Board acknowledges that it has overall responsibility for the Group’s system of internal control and for reviewing its effectiveness, at 
least annually. 

Internal control procedures are designed to manage rather than eliminate the risk of failure to achieve business objectives, and can only 
provide reasonable and not absolute assurance against material misstatement or loss. 

There are ongoing processes and procedures for identifying, evaluating and managing the significant risks faced by the Group. These 
processes and procedures were in place from the start of the financial year to the date on which the 2012 Annual Report and Accounts 
were approved and accord with the Turnbull guidance issued in 2005. 

The processes are regularly reviewed by the Board and include an annual review by the Directors of the operation and effectiveness of the 
system of internal control as part of its year end procedures. The key features of the system of internal control include: 

clear organisational structure 
The Group operates through autonomous divisions and operating companies, each with its own board. Operating company boards meet 
on a weekly basis and divisional boards on a monthly basis, and comprehensive information is prepared for such meetings on a 
standardised basis to cover all aspects of the business. Formal reporting lines and delegated levels of authority exist within this structure 
and the review of risk and performance occurs at multiple levels throughout the operating companies, divisions and at Group. 

risk assessment 
Risk reporting is embedded within ongoing management reporting throughout the Group. At operating company and divisional level, 
Board meeting agendas and packs are structured around the key risks facing the Group. These risks include health and safety, sales, 
production (build cost and programme), land and planning, economic, regulatory and site specific matters. 

In addition, there is a formalised process whereby each division produces quarterly risks and control reports that identify significant risks, 
the potential impact and the actions being taken to mitigate the risks. These risk reports are reviewed and updated regularly. 

A Group Risk Management Report is presented at each Group Main Board Meeting, setting out the current factors affecting the risk 
profile of the Group, the mitigation of these risks and the key changes to this risk profile since the last report. 

financial reporting 
A comprehensive budgeting and real-time forecasting system, covering both profit and cash, operates within the Group. This enables 
executive management to view key financial and operating data on a daily basis. On a weekly and monthly basis more formal reporting up 
to the Group Executives and the Board is prepared. The results of all operating units are reported monthly and compared to budget and 
forecast. 

There is a consolidation process in place which ensures that there is an audit trail between the Group’s financial reporting system and the 
Group’s statutory financial statements. 

Investment and contracting controls 
The Group has clearly defined guidelines for the purchase and sale of land within the Group, which include detailed environmental, 
planning and financial appraisal and are subject to executive authorisation. Rigorous procedures are also followed for the selection of 
consultants and contractors. The review and monitoring of all build programmes and budgets are a fundamental element of the 
Company’s financial reporting cycle. 

Berkeley Annual Report 2012

 109 

GovernanceGovernance	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
corporate Governance
 

policies and procedures 
Policies and procedures, including operating and financial controls, are detailed in policies and procedures manuals that are refreshed and 
improved as appropriate. Training to staff is given where necessary. 

central functions 
Strong central functions, including Legal, Health & Safety and Company Secretarial, provide support and consistency to the rest of the 
Group. In addition, the principal treasury-related risks, decisions and control processes are managed by the Group Finance function, under 
the direction of the Group Finance Director. 

Internal audit 
Internal auditors are in place in each division and at Group to provide assurance on the operation of the Group’s control framework. 

whistleblowing 
The Group has a whistleblowing policy which has been communicated to all staff, where Directors, management and staff can report in 
confidence any concerns they may have of malpractice, financial irregularity, breaches of any Group procedures, or other matters. The 
arrangements in place are reviewed by the Audit Committee. 

Bribery act 
In advance of the implementation of the Bribery Act on 1 July 2011, the Group undertook a thorough review of the requirements of the 
Act to ensure that it had adequate policies and procedures in place to prevent bribery. This included providing training to staff and 
implementing an Anti Bribery and Corruption policy, which was communicated to all staff. 

The Finance Director has the executive responsibility for implementing the Group’s policy and reporting to the Audit Committee, who are 
charged with overseeing the development and implementation of the Group’s policies and procedures and monitoring ongoing 
compliance. 

relatIons wIth shareholders 

The Company encourages active dialogue with its current and prospective shareholders through ongoing meetings with institutional 
investors. Major shareholders have the opportunity to meet all Directors after the Annual General Meeting in addition to individual 
meetings with the Company. 

Shareholders are also kept up to date with the Company’s activities through the Annual and Interim Reports. In addition, the corporate 
website gives information on the Group and latest news, including regulatory announcements. The presentations made after the 
announcement of the preliminary and interim results are also available on the website. 

The Board is kept informed of the views of the shareholders through periodic reports from the Company’s broker UBS. Additionally, the 
Non-executive Directors have the opportunity to attend the bi-annual analyst presentations. 

The Senior Independent Director is available to shareholders if they have concerns where contact through the normal channels has failed 
or when such contact is inappropriate. 

annual General meetInG 

All shareholders are invited to participate in the Annual General Meeting (“AGM”) where the Group Chairman, the Group Managing 
Director and the Chairmen of the Audit, Remuneration and Nomination Committees will be available to answer questions and will also be 
available for discussions with shareholders both prior to and after the meeting. 

The Company arranges for the Annual Report and Accounts and related papers to be posted to shareholders so as to allow at least 20 
working days for consideration prior to the AGM. 

The Company complies with the provisions of the Code relating to the disclosure of proxy votes, which, including abstentions, are 
declared at the AGM after each resolution has been dealt with on a show of hands and are announced to the Stock Exchange shortly after 
the close of the meeting. The Company also complies with the requirements of the Code with the separation of resolutions and the 
attendance of the Chairmen of the Board Committees. 

The terms and conditions of appointment for the Non-executive Directors, which set out their expected time commitment, in addition to 
the service contracts for the Executive Directors, are available for inspection at the AGM and during normal business hours at the 
Company’s registered office. 

GoInG concern 

The Group’s business activities together with the factors likely to affect its future development performance and position are set out in the 
Business Review. The financial position of the Group, its cash flows, liquidity position and borrowing facilities are all described in the 
Trading and Financial review on pages 64 to 79. 

The Group has significant financial resources and the Directors have assessed the future funding requirements of the Group and compared 
this to the level of committed loan facilities and cash resources over the medium term. In making this assessment consideration has been 
given to the uncertainty inherent in future financial forecasts and where applicable reasonable sensitivities have been applied to the key 
factors affecting the financial performance of the Group. 

110  Berkeley Annual Report 2012 

UNCOATED PAPER FROM THIS PAGE ONWARDS

Governance 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
The Directors have a reasonable expectation that the Company has adequate resources to continue its operational existence  
for the foreseeable future. For this reason they continue to adopt the going concern basis of accounting in preparing the annual  
financial statements. 

share capItal structure 

The Company is compliant with DTR 7.2.6. and the information relating to the Company’s share capital structure is included in the 
Directors’ Report on page 86. 

statement of dIrectors’ responsIBIlItIes In respect of the annual report  
and the fInancIal statements 

The Directors are responsible for preparing the Annual Report, the Remuneration Report and the financial statements in accordance with 
applicable law and regulations. 

Company law requires the Directors to prepare financial statements for each financial year. Under that law the Directors have prepared the 
Consolidated Financial Statements in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRSs) as adopted by the European 
Union, and have prepared the Parent Company Financial Statements in accordance with United Kingdom Accounting Standards (United 
Kingdom Generally Accepted Accounting Practice) and applicable law. 

Under company law the Directors must not approve the financial statements unless they are satisfied that they give a true and fair view of 
the state of affairs of the Group and the Company and of the profit or loss of the Group for that period. 

In preparing these financial statements, the Directors are required to: 

•	 select suitable accounting policies and then apply them consistently; 

•	 make judgements and estimates that are reasonable and prudent; 

•	 state whether IFRS as adopted by the European Union and applicable UK accounting standards have been followed, subject to any 

material departures disclosed and explained in the Group and Parent Company Financial Statements respectively; and 

•	 prepare financial statements on the going concern basis unless it is inappropriate to presume that the Group will continue in business. 

The Directors are responsible for keeping adequate accounting records that are sufficient to show and explain the Company’s transactions 
and disclose with reasonable accuracy at any time the financial position of the Company and the Group and to enable them to ensure that 
the financial statements and the Remuneration Report comply with the Companies Act 2006 and, as regards the Group financial 
statements, Article 4 of the IAS Regulation. They are also responsible for safeguarding the assets of the Company and the Group and 
hence for taking reasonable steps for the prevention and detection of fraud and other irregularities. 

The Directors are responsible for the maintenance and integrity of the Company’s website. Legislation in the United Kingdom governing 
the preparation and dissemination of financial statements may differ from legislation in other jurisdictions. 

dIrectors’ responsIBIlIty statement 

Each of the Directors, whose names and functions are listed in the Directors’ Report confirm that, to the best of each person’s knowledge: 

a  the Group financial statements, which have been prepared in accordance with IFRS as adopted by the European Union, give a true and 

fair view of the assets, liabilities, financial position and profit or loss of the Group; and 

b  the management report, which is incorporated into the Directors’ report, includes a fair review of the development and performance of 

the business and the position of the Group, together with a description of the principal risks and uncertainties that it faces. 

By order of the Board 

A M Bradshaw 
Company Secretary 
19 July 2012 

UNCOATED PAPER FROM THIS PAGE ONWARDS

Berkeley Annual Report 2012

 111 

GovernanceGovernance	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
   
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
   
 
financials 

FINANCIAlS 
BASIC EARNINGS PER SHARE 
HAvE INCREASED By 67.8%, 
OUR BAlANCE SHEET REMAINS 
STRONG AND FORWARD SAlES 
STAND AT OvER £1 BIllION. 

112  Berkeley annual report 2012 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
financials 

i

F
n
a
n
c
i
a
l
s

Berkeley annual report 2012

 113
 

 
INDEPENDENT AUDITORS’ REPORT TO THE MEMBERS 
OF THE BERKELEY GROUP HOLDINGS PLC 

We have audited the Consolidated Financial Statements of The Berkeley Group Holdings plc for the year ended 30 April 2012 which 
comprise the Consolidated Income Statement, the Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income, the Consolidated Statement of 
Financial Position, the Consolidated Statement of Changes in Equity, the Consolidated Cash Flow Statement and the related notes. The 
financial reporting framework that has been applied in their preparation is applicable law and International Financial Reporting Standards 
(IFRSs) as adopted by the European Union. 

RESPECTIVE RESPONSIBILITIES OF DIRECTORS AND AUDITORS 
As explained more fully in the Directors’ Responsibilities Statement set out on page 111, the Directors are responsible for the preparation 
of the Consolidated Financial Statements and for being satisfied that they give a true and fair view. Our responsibility is to audit and 
express an opinion on the Consolidated Financial Statements in accordance with applicable law and International Standards on Auditing 
(UK and Ireland). Those standards require us to comply with the Auditing Practices Board’s Ethical Standards for Auditors. 

This report, including the opinions, has been prepared for and only for the Company’s members as a body in accordance with Chapter 3 
of Part 16 of the Companies Act 2006 and for no other purpose. We do not, in giving these opinions, accept or assume responsibility for 
any other purpose or to any other person to whom this report is shown or into whose hands it may come save where expressly agreed by 
our prior consent in writing. 

SCOPE OF THE AUDIT OF THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
An audit involves obtaining evidence about the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements sufficient to give reasonable assurance 
that the financial statements are free from material misstatement, whether caused by fraud or error. This includes an assessment of: 
whether the accounting policies are appropriate to the Group’s circumstances and have been consistently applied and adequately 
disclosed; the reasonableness of significant accounting estimates made by the Directors; and the overall presentation of the financial 
statements. In addition, we read all the financial and non-financial information in the Annual Report to identify material inconsistencies 
with the audited financial statements. If we become aware of any apparent material misstatements or inconsistencies we consider the 
implications for our report. 

OPINION ON FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
In our opinion the Consolidated Financial Statements: 

•	 give a true and fair view of the state of the Group’s affairs as at 30 April 2012 and of its profit and cash flows for the year then ended; 

•	 have been properly prepared in accordance with IFRSs as adopted by the European Union; and 

•	 have been prepared in accordance with the requirements of the Companies Act 2006 and Article 4 of the lAS Regulation. 

OPINION ON OTHER MATTERS PRESCRIBED BY THE COMPANIES ACT 2006 
In our opinion: 

•	 the information given in the Directors’ Report for the financial year for which the Consolidated Financial Statements are prepared is 

consistent with the Consolidated Financial Statements; and 

•	 the information given in the Corporate Governance Statement set out on pages 106 to 111 with respect to internal control and risk 

management systems and about share capital structures is consistent with the Consolidated Financial Statements. 

MATTERS ON WHICH WE ARE REQUIRED TO REPORT BY EXCEPTION 
We have nothing to report in respect of the following: 


Under the Companies Act 2006 we are required to report to you if, in our opinion: 


•	 certain disclosures of Directors’ remuneration specified by law are not made; or 

•	 we have not received all the information and explanations we require for our audit; or 

•	 a corporate governance statement has not been prepared by the Parent Company. 

Under the Listing Rules we are required to review: 

•	 the Directors’ statement, set out on pages 110 to 111, in relation to going concern; 

•	 the part of the Corporate Governance Statement relating to the Company’s compliance with the nine provisions of the UK Corporate 

Governance Code specified for our review; and 

•	 certain elements of the report to shareholders by the Board on Directors’ remuneration. 

OTHER MATTER 
We have reported separately on the Parent Company Financial Statements of The Berkeley Group Holdings plc for the year ended  
30 April 2012 and on the information in the Directors’ Remuneration Report that is described as having been audited. 

Mark Gill (Senior Statutory Auditor) 

for and on behalf of PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP 

Chartered Accountants and Statutory Auditors 
London 
19 July 2012 

114  Berkeley Annual Report 2012 

Financials	 	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
CONSOLIDATED INCOME STATEMENT 

For the year ended 30 April 

Revenue 

Cost of sales 

Gross profit 

Net operating expenses 

Operating profit before exceptional item 

Exceptional profit on disposal of subsidiary 

Operating profit 

Finance income 

Finance costs 

Share of post tax results of joint ventures using the equity method 

Profit before taxation for the year	 

Income tax expense 

Profit after taxation for the year 

Profit attributable to: 

Shareholders 

Non-controlling interest 

Earnings per ordinary share attributable to shareholders: 

Basic 

Diluted 

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT 
OF COMPREHENSIVE INCOME 

For the year ended 30 April 

Profit after taxation for the year 

Other comprehensive (expense)/income: 

Actuarial loss recognised in the pension scheme 

Deferred tax on actuarial loss recognised in the pension scheme 

Other comprehensive expense for the year 

Total comprehensive income for the year 

Attributable to: 

Shareholders 

Non-controlling interest 

Notes 

2012 
£’000 

2011 
£’000 

8 

3 

3 

11 

2, 4	 

6 

1,041,069 

742,612 

(745,773) 

(533,542) 

295,296

 209,070 

(99,566) 

(73,420) 

195,730

 209,070 

30,695 

– 

226,425

 135,650 

2,369

(11,781) 

(2,192) 

 10,056 

(11,520) 

2,059 

214,821 

136,245 

(56,674) 

158,147 

(41,789) 

94,456 

158,513

(366) 

158,147 

 95,109 

(653) 

94,456 

7 

7 

121.0p 

112.8p 

72.1p 

70.3p 

Notes 

5 

6 

2012 
£’000 

158,147 

(628) 

151

(477) 

2011 
£’000 

94,456 

(653) 

 170 

(483) 

157,670 

93,973 

158,036 

(366) 

158,670

94,626 

(653) 

 93,973 

Berkeley Annual Report 2012

 115 

FinancialsFinancials  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
 
 
	
 
 
 
 
 
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
	
 
 
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION 

As at 30 April 

Assets 

Non-current assets 

Intangible assets 

Property, plant and equipment 

Investment properties 

Investments accounted for using the equity method 

Deferred tax assets 

Current assets 

Inventories 

Trade and other receivables 

Cash and cash equivalents	 

Total assets 

Liabilities 

Non-current liabilities 

Borrowings 

Trade and other payables 

Current liabilities 

Borrowings 

Trade and other payables 

Current tax liabilities 

Total liabilities 

Total net assets 

Equity 

Shareholders’ equity 

Share capital 

Share premium 

Capital redemption reserve 

Other reserve 

Revaluation reserve 

Retained earnings 

Non-controlling interest 

Total equity 

Notes 

2012
£’000

 2011 
 £’000 

9 

10 

10 

11 

17 

12 

13 

14	 

15 

16 

15 

16 

18 

18 

19 

19 

19 

19 

17,159

11,559

83,522 

46,481

25,040 

 17,159 

 10,620 

28,558 

 38,675 

18,881 

183,761

 113,893 

1,851,715

 1,613,192 

115,210

2,747

 96,725 

 266,307 

1,969,672 

1,976,224 

2,153,433

 2,090,117 

(12,498) 

(30,391) 

(42,889) 

(24,233) 

(51,009) 

(75,242) 

(48,130) 

(862,707) 

(99,873) 

(200,029) 

(787,204) 

(93,864) 

(1,010,710) 

(1,081,097) 

(1,053,599) 

(1,156,339) 

1,099,834

 933,778 

6,743 

49,315 

24,516 

6,743 

49,315 

24,516 

(961,299) 

(961,299) 

3,375 

3,435 

1,977,184 

1,806,704 

1,099,834 

929,414 

– 

4,364 

1,099,834

 933,778 

The financial statements on pages 115 to 141 were approved by the board of directors on 19 July 2012 and were signed on its behalf by: 

N G Simpkin 
Finance Director 

116  Berkeley Annual Report 2012 

Financials 
 
 
  
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
 
 
 
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
 
 
 
 
 
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
 
 
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
 
 
	
	
	
 
 
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
 
 
	
 
 
	
	
 
 
	
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF CHANGES IN EQUITY
 

Attributable to shareholders

 Share 
capital 
 £’000 

 Capital 
 Share  redemption 
 reserve 
£’000 

 premium 
£’000 

Other  Revaluation 
 reserve 
£’000 

 reserve 
£’000 

Retained 
 earnings 
£’000 

Non-
 controlling 
 interest 
£’000 

 Total 
£’000 

 Total 
equity
£’000 

At 1 May 2011	 

6,743	 

49,315	 

24,516	 

(961,299)	 

3,435	  1,806,704	  929,414	 

4,364	 

933,778 

Profit/(loss) after taxation  
for the year	 

Other comprehensive  
expense for the year	 

Funding from non-controlling  
interest in subsidiary  
undertaking 

Disposal of investment 
in subsidiary	 

Reserves transfer from  

revaluation reserve (note 19) 

Transactions with shareholders: 

Credit in respect of employee  
share schemes (note 5) 

Deferred tax in respect of  
employee share schemes  
(note 6)	 

–	 

–	 

– 

–	 

– 

– 

–	 

–	 

–	 

– 

–	 

– 

– 

–	 

–	 

–	 

– 

–	 

– 

– 

–	 

–	 

–	 

– 

–	 

– 

– 

–	 

–	 

158,513	  158,513	 

(366)	 

158,147 

(477)	 

(477)	 

–	 

(477) 

–

–	 

– 

–	 

– 

65 

65 

(4,063)	 

(4,063) 

– 

–
 

(60) 

60 

–	 

– 

–	 

– 

8,212 

8,212 

– 

8,212 

At 30 April 2012 

6,743 

49,315 

24,516 

(961,299) 

3,375 

1,977,184  1,099,834 

–	 

4,172	 

4,172	 

–	 

4,172 

–  1,099,834 

Attributable to shareholders

 Share 
capital 
 £’000 

 Capital 
 Share  redemption 
 reserve 
£’000 

 premium 
£’000 

Other  Revaluation 
 reserve 
£’000 

 reserve 
£’000 

Retained 
 earnings 
£’000 

Non-
 controlling 
 interest 
£’000 

 Total 
£’000 

 Total 
equity
£’000 

At 1 May 2010	 

6,743	 

49,315	 

24,516	 

(961,299)	 

3,489	  1,735,832	  858,596	 

3,720	 

862,316 

Profit/(loss) after taxation  
for the year	 

Other comprehensive  
expense for the year	 

Funding from non-controlling  
interest in subsidiary  
undertaking 

Reserves transfer from  
revaluation reserve (note 19)	 

Transactions with shareholders: 

Purchase of own shares  

(note 19) 

Credit in respect of employee 
share schemes (note 5)	 

Deferred tax in respect of  
employee share schemes  
(note 6)	 

–	 

–	 

– 

–	 

– 

–	 

–	 

–	 

–	 

– 

–	 

– 

–	 

–	 

–	 

–	 

– 

–	 

– 

–	 

–	 

–	 

–	 

– 

–	 

– 

–	 

–	 

–	 

–	 

– 

(54)	 

– 

–	 

95,109	 

95,109	 

(653)	 

94,456 

(483)	 

(483)	 

–	 

(483) 

– 

54	 

– 

–	 

1,297 

1,297 

–	 

– 

(30,002) 

(30,002) 

– 

(30,002)
 

4,146	 

4,146	 

–	 

4,146 

–	 

2,048	 

2,048	 

–	 

2,048 

At 30 April 2011 

6,743 

49,315 

24,516 

(961,299) 

3,435  1,806,704  929,414 

4,364 

933,778 

Berkeley Annual Report 2012

 117 

FinancialsFinancials 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	 	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	 	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
CONSOLIDATED CASH FLOW STATEMENT 

For the year ended 30 April 

Cash flows from operating activities 

Cash outflow from operations	 

Interest received 

Interest paid 

Income tax paid 

Net cash flow from operating activities	 

Cash flows from investing activities 

Purchase of property, plant and equipment 

Sale of property, plant and equipment 

Funding of non-controlling interest in subsidiary undertaking 

Disposal of subsidiary undertaking 

Cash balance in subsidiary undertaking disposed 

Purchase of shares in joint ventures 

Movements in loans with joint ventures 

Net cash flow from investing activities	 

Cash flows from financing activities 

Purchase of own shares 

Expenses related to the disposal of the subsidiary undertaking 

Repayment of loan stock 

Proceeds from borrowings 

Net cash flow from financing activities	 

Net decrease in cash and cash equivalents 

Cash and cash equivalents, including bank overdraft, at the start of the financial year 

Notes 

2012
£’000

 2011 
 £’000 

22	 

(108,936) 

(204,266) 

5,463 

(5,412) 

9,416 

(5,490) 

(53,673) 

(32,631) 

(162,558)

 (232,971) 

10 

(2,280) 

200

65

8 

75,668 

(207) 

– 

(9,998) 

63,448 

(2,008) 

 267 

 1,297 

– 

– 

440 

(11,038) 

(11,042) 

11 

11 

19 

8 

– 

(816) 

(20) 

(30,002) 

– 

(19) 

(163,614)

(164,450) 

 191,222 

161,201 

(263,560)

266,307 

 (82,812) 

349,119 

Cash and cash equivalents, including bank overdraft, at the end of the financial year	 

14	 

2,747

 266,307 

118  Berkeley Annual Report 2012 

Financials 
 
  
 
 
 
  
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
	
	
 
 
	
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL 
STATEMENTS 

1 ACCOUNTING POLICIES 

General Information 
The Berkeley Group Holdings plc (the “Company”) is a public limited company incorporated and domiciled in the United Kingdom. The 
address of its registered office is Berkeley House, 19 Portsmouth Road, Cobham, Surrey, KT11 1JG. The Company and its subsidiaries 
(together the “Group”) are engaged in residential-led, mixed-use property development. Further information about the nature of the 
Group’s operations and its principal activities are set out in the Directors’ Report on page 86. 

Basis of preparation 
These Consolidated Financial Statements have been prepared in accordance with European Union endorsed International Financial 
Reporting Standards (“IFRSs”), IFRIC interpretations and with those parts of the Companies Act 2006 applicable to companies reporting 
under IFRS. The Consolidated Financial Statements have been prepared under the historical cost convention and on the going concern 
basis. Historical cost is generally based on the fair value of the consideration given in exchange for the assets. 

The preparation of financial statements in conformity with IFRS requires the use of certain critical accounting estimates. It also requires 
management to exercise its judgement in the process of applying the Group’s accounting policies. The areas involving a higher degree of 
judgement or complexity, or areas where assumptions and estimates are significant to the Consolidated Financial Statements, are 
disclosed on page 122. 

There were no new standards, amendments or interpretations that were adopted by the Group and effective for the first time for the 
financial year beginning 1 May 2011 that were material to the Group. Furthermore, there are no standards, amendments or interpretations 
that are not yet effective that would be expected to have a material impact on the Group. 

Basis of consolidation 

(a) Subsidiaries 
The Consolidated Financial Statements comprise the financial statements of the Parent Company and all its subsidiary undertakings. The 
accounting date for subsidiary undertakings is 30 April. 

Subsidiary undertakings are entities that are directly or indirectly controlled by the Group. Control exists where the Group has the power 
to govern the financial and operating policies of the entity so as to obtain the benefits from its activities. 

The purchase method of accounting is used to account for the acquisition of subsidiary undertakings by the Group. The cost of an 
acquisition is measured as the fair value of the assets given, equity instruments issued and liabilities incurred or assumed at the date of 
exchange, plus costs directly attributable to the acquisition. Identifiable assets acquired and liabilities and contingent liabilities assumed in 
a business combination are measured initially at their fair values at the acquisition date, irrespective of the extent of any non-controlling 
interest. The excess of cost of acquisition over the fair value of the Group’s share of identifiable net assets acquired is recorded as 
goodwill. If the cost of the acquisition is less than the fair value of the net assets of the subsidiary acquired, the difference is recognised 
directly in the income statement. 

Where necessary, adjustments are made to the financial statements of subsidiaries to bring the accounting policies used into line with 
those used by the Group. All intra-Group transactions, balances, income and expenses are eliminated on consolidation. 

(b) Non-controlling interests 
Non-controlling interests in the net assets of consolidated subsidiaries are identified separately from the Group’s equity therein. 
Non-controlling interests consist of the amount of those interests at the date of the original business combination and those interests’ 
share of changes in the equity since the date of the combination. 

(c) Joint ventures 
Entities which are jointly controlled with another party or parties (“joint ventures”) are accounted for using the equity method of 
accounting. The results attributable to the Group’s holding in joint ventures are shown separately in the consolidated income statement. 
The amount included in the consolidated statement of financial position is the Group’s share of the net assets of the joint ventures plus net 
loans receivable. Goodwill arising on the acquisition of joint ventures is accounted for in accordance with the policy set out above. The 
carrying value of goodwill is included in the carrying value of the investment in joint ventures. On transfer of land and/or work in progress 
to joint ventures, the Group recognises only its share of any profits or losses, namely that proportion sold outside the Group. 

Segmental reporting 
Operating segments are identified in a manner consistent with the internal reporting provided to the chief operating decision-maker. The 
Group determines its reportable segments having regard to permitted aggregation criteria with the principal condition being that the 
operating segments should have similar economic characteristics. 

The Group is predominantly engaged in residential-led, mixed-use property development, comprising residential revenue, revenue from 
land sales and commercial revenue. 

Berkeley Annual Report 2012

 119 

Notes to the Consolidated Financial StatementsFinancials1 ACCOUNTING POLICIES CONTINUED 
For the purposes of determining its operating segments, the chief operating decision-maker has been identified as the Executive 
Committee of the Board. This committee approves investment decisions, allocates the Group’s resources and reviews the internal 
reporting in order to assess performance. 

The Group has determined that its operating segments are the management teams that report into the Executive Committee of the 
Board. These management teams are all engaged in residential-led, mixed-use development in the United Kingdom and, having regard 
to the aggregation criteria in IFRS 8, the Group has one reportable operating segment. 

In addition to its development activities, the Group holds certain residential properties for investment purposes. These investment 
activities represent a separate segment which is included within “Other activities”, as it does not meet the size thresholds to be disclosed 
as a separate reportable segment. 

Revenue 
Revenue represents the amounts receivable from the sale of properties during the year and other income directly associated with property 
development. Properties are treated as sold and profits are recognised when contracts are exchanged and the building work is physically 
complete. 

Rental income is recognised in the income statement on a straight line basis over the life of the lease. Any lease incentives are recognised 
as an integral part of the total rental income. 

Expenditure 
Expenditure recorded in inventory is expensed through cost of sales at the time of the related property sale. Net operating expenditure is 
recognised in respect of goods and services received when supplied in accordance with contractual terms. Provision is made when an 
obligation exists for a future liability in respect of a past event and where the amount of the obligation can be reliably estimated. 

Taxation 
The taxation expense represents the sum of the current tax payable and deferred tax. Current tax, including UK corporation tax, is 
provided at the amounts expected to be paid (or received) using the tax rules and laws that have been enacted, or substantively enacted, 
by the balance sheet date. 

Deferred taxation is the tax expected to be payable or recoverable on differences between the carrying amounts of assets and liabilities in 
the financial statements and corresponding tax bases used in the computation of taxable profit, and is accounted for using the balance 
sheet liability method. Deferred tax liabilities are generally recognised on all taxable temporary differences. Deferred tax assets are 
recognised to the extent that it is probable that taxable profits will be available against which deductible temporary differences can be 
utilised. Such assets and liabilities are not recognised if the temporary difference arises from goodwill, or from the initial recognition 
(except in a business combination) of other assets and liabilities in a transaction that affects neither the taxable profit nor the accounting 
profit, or from differences relating to investments in subsidiaries to the extent that it is probable that they will not reverse in the 
foreseeable future. 

Deferred taxation is calculated at the tax rates that are expected to apply in the period when the liability is settled or the asset is realised 
based on tax laws and rates that have been enacted at the balance sheet date. The carrying value of deferred tax assets is reviewed at 
each balance sheet date and reduced to the extent that it is no longer probable that sufficient taxable profits will be available against 
which taxable temporary differences can be utilised. Deferred taxation is charged or credited to the income statement, except when it 
relates to items charged or credited directly to reserves, in which case the deferred taxation is also dealt with in reserves. 

Deferred taxation assets and liabilities are offset when there is a legally enforceable right to offset current tax assets against current tax 
liabilities and when the deferred taxation assets and liabilities relate to income taxes levied by the same taxation authority on either the 
taxable entity or different taxable entities where there is an intention to settle the balances on a net basis. 

Intangible assets 
Where the cost of acquiring new and additional interests in subsidiaries, joint ventures and businesses exceeds the fair value of the net 
assets acquired, the resulting premium on acquisition (goodwill) is capitalised and its subsequent measurement is based on annual 
impairment reviews and impairment reviews performed where an impairment indicator exists, with any impairment losses recognised 
immediately in the income statement. Goodwill is allocated to cash-generating units for the purpose of impairment testing. The allocation 
is made to those cash-generating units or groups of cash-generating units that are expected to benefit from the business combination in 
which the goodwill arose. 

Property, plant and equipment 
Property, plant and equipment is carried at historic purchase cost less depreciation. Cost includes the original purchase price of the asset 
and the costs attributable to bringing the asset to its working condition for its intended use. Depreciation is provided to write off the cost 
of the assets on a straight line basis to their residual value over their estimated useful lives at the following annual rates: 

Freehold buildings 
Motor vehicles 

2% 
25% 

Fixtures and fittings 
Computer equipment 

15% / 20% 
33 1/3 % 

120  Berkeley Annual Report 2012 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTSNotes to the Consolidated Financial Statements 
 
 
 
 
 
Freehold property disclosed in note 10 to the consolidated financial statements consists of both freehold land and freehold buildings. No 
depreciation is provided on freehold land. Computer equipment is included within fixtures and fittings. The assets’ residual values, 
carrying values and useful lives are reviewed on an annual basis and adjusted if appropriate at each balance sheet date. Where an 
impairment is identified, the recoverable amount of the asset is identified and an impairment loss, where appropriate, is recognised in the 
income statement. 

Subsequent costs are included in the assets’ carrying amount or recognised as a separate asset, as appropriate, only when it is probable 
that future economic benefits associated with the item will flow to the Group and the cost of the item can be measured reliably. The 
carrying amount of the replaced part is derecognised. All other repairs and maintenance are charged to the income statement during the 
financial period in which they are incurred. 

Gains and losses on disposals are determined by comparing the proceeds with the carrying amount and are recognised within net 
operating expenses in the income statement. 

Investment properties 
Investment properties, which are properties held to earn rental income, are recognised using the “cost model” and are carried in the 
statement of financial position at historic cost less accumulated depreciation. 

Depreciation is provided to write off the element of the cost of the assets that relates to buildings at 2% per annum on a straight line 
basis. No depreciation is charged on the element of the cost of the assets that relates to land. 

Inventories 
Property in the course of development and completed units are valued at the lower of cost and net realisable value. Direct cost comprises 
the cost of land, raw materials and development costs but excludes indirect overheads. Provision is made, where appropriate, to reduce 
the value of inventories and work in progress to their net realisable value. 

Land purchased for development, including land in the course of development, is initially recorded at fair value. Where such land is 
purchased on deferred settlement terms, and the fair value differs from the amount that will subsequently be paid in settling the liability, 
this difference is charged as a finance cost in the income statement over the period to settlement. 

Trade and other receivables 
Trade receivables are recognised initially at fair value and subsequently measured at amortised cost using the effective interest method, 
less provision for impairment. A provision for impairment of trade receivables is established when there is objective evidence that the 
Group will not be able to collect all amounts due according to the original terms of the receivables. The amount of the provision is the 
difference between the asset’s carrying amount and the present value of estimated future cash flows, discounted at the original effective 
interest rate. The carrying amount of the asset is reduced through the use of an allowance account, and the amount of the loss is 
recognised in the income statement within net operating expenses. When a trade receivable is uncollectible, it is written off against the 
allowance account for trade receivables. Subsequent recoveries of amounts previously written off are credited against net operating 
expense in the income statement. 

Cash and cash equivalents 
Cash and cash equivalents comprises cash balances in hand and at the bank, including bank overdrafts repayable on demand which form 
part of the Group’s cash management, for which offset arrangements across Group businesses have been applied where appropriate. 

Share capital 
Ordinary shares and redeemable preference shares are classified as equity. 

Incremental costs directly attributable to the issue of new shares or options are shown in equity as a deduction, net of tax, from the 
proceeds. 

Where any Group company purchases the Company’s equity share capital (treasury shares), the consideration paid, including any directly 
attributable incremental costs (net of income taxes) is deducted from equity attributable to the Company’s equity holders until the shares 
are cancelled, sold or reissued. Where such shares are subsequently sold or reissued, any consideration received, net of any directly 
attributable incremental transaction costs and the related income tax effects, is included in equity attributable to the Company’s equity 
holders. 

Borrowings 
Borrowings are recognised initially at fair value, net of transaction costs incurred. Any difference between the proceeds (net of transaction 
costs) and the redemption value is recognised in the income statement over the period of the borrowings using the effective interest method. 

Trade and other payables 
Trade and other payables on normal terms are not interest bearing and are stated at their nominal value which is considered to be their 
fair value. Trade payables on extended terms are recorded at their fair value at the date of acquisition of the asset to which they relate. 
The discount to nominal value is amortised over the period of the credit term and charged to finance costs. 

Berkeley Annual Report 2012

 121 

Notes to the Consolidated Financial StatementsFinancials 
1 ACCOUNTING POLICIES CONTINUED 

Deposits 
New property deposits and on account contract receipts are held within current trade and other payables. 

Employee benefits 

(a) Pensions 
The Group accounts for pensions under IAS 19 “Employee benefits”. The Group has both defined benefit and defined contribution plans. 
The defined benefit plan was closed to future accrual with effect from 1 April 2007. 

For the defined benefit scheme, the obligations are measured using the projected unit method. The calculation of the net obligation is 
performed by a qualified actuary. The operating and financing costs of these plans are recognised separately in the income statement; 
service costs are set annually on the basis of actuarial valuations of the scheme and financing costs are recognised in the period in which 
they arise. Actuarial gains and losses are recognised immediately in the statement of comprehensive income and expense. In accordance 
with IAS 19 the Group does not recognise on the statement of financial position any surplus in the scheme. 

Pension contributions under defined contribution schemes are charged to the income statement as they fall due. 

(b) Share-based payments 
Where the Company operates equity-settled, share-based compensation plans, the fair value of the employee services received in 
exchange for the grant of the options is recognised as an expense. The total amount to be expensed over the vesting period is 
determined by reference to the fair value of the options granted. At each balance sheet date, the Group revises its estimates of the 
number of options that are expected to vest. It recognises the impact of the revision to original estimates, if any, in the income statement, 
with a corresponding adjustment to equity. 

The proceeds received net of any directly attributable transaction costs are credited to share capital (nominal value) and share premium 
when the options are exercised. 

Leasing agreements 
Payments under operating lease agreements are charged against profit on a straight line basis over the life of the lease. 

Accounting estimates and judgements 
Management applies the Group’s accounting policies as described above when making critical accounting judgements, of which no 
individual judgement is deemed to have a significant impact upon the financial statements, apart from those involving estimations, which 
are detailed below. 

(a) Carrying value of land and work in progress and estimation of costs to complete 
The Group holds inventories stated at the lower of cost and net realisable value. Such inventories include land, work in progress and 
completed units. As residential development is largely speculative by nature, not all inventories are covered by forward sales contracts. 
Furthermore due to the nature of the Group’s activity and, in particular the scale of its developments and the length of the development 
cycle, the Group has to allocate site-wide development costs between units being built and/or completed in the current year and those 
for future years. It also has to forecast the costs to complete on such developments. 

In making such assessments and allocations, there is a degree of inherent estimation uncertainty. The Group has established internal controls 
designed to effectively assess and centrally review inventory carrying values and ensure the appropriateness of the estimates made. 

(b) Pensions 
Pension assumptions are set out within note 5 and are as advised by the Group’s actuary. The assumptions include the expected long-term 
rate of return on assets, the discount rate used and the mortality rates. Such estimations are based on assumed rates and, should these 
differ from what actually transpires, the pension asset of the Group would change. 

(c) Goodwill impairment 
In determining whether or not goodwill is impaired requires an estimation of value in use of the cash-generating units to which goodwill 
has been allocated. The value in use calculation requires an estimate of the future cash flows expected to arise from the cash-generating 
unit, the future growth rate of revenue and costs, and a suitable discount rate. 

(d) Deferred tax 
Assumptions are made as to the recoverability of deferred tax assets, especially as to whether there will be sufficient future profits to fully 
utilise these in future years. 

(e) Share-based payments 
Assumptions are made in determining the fair value of employee services received in exchange for the grant of options under share-based 
payment awards at the date of grant. 

122  Berkeley Annual Report 2012 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTSNotes to the Consolidated Financial Statements 
2 SEGMENTAL DISCLOSURE 

The Group is engaged in residential-led, mixed-use property development, comprising residential revenue, revenue from land sales and 
commercial revenue. 

For the purposes of determining its operating segments, the chief operating decision-maker has been identified as the Executive 
Committee of the Board. This committee approves investment decisions, allocates the Group’s resources and reviews the internal 
reporting in order to assess performance. 

The Group has determined that its operating segments are the management teams that report into the Executive Committee of the 
Board. These management teams are all engaged in residential-led, mixed-use development in the United Kingdom and, having regard 
to the aggregation criteria in IFRS 8, the Group has one reportable operating segment. 

In addition to its development activities, the Group holds certain residential properties for investment purposes. These investment 
activities represent a separate segment which is included within other activities, as it does not meet the size thresholds to be disclosed as 
separate reportable segments. 

Segment results 

Profit before tax 

Residential-led mixed-use development 

Other activities 

2012 
£’000

2011 
 £’000 

215,156

 136,512 

(335) 

(267) 

214,821

 136,245 

Segment profit before tax represents the profit before tax allocated to each segment. This is the measure reported to the Executive 
Committee of the Board for the purpose of resource allocation and assessment of segment performance. 

Segment assets 

Assets 

Residential-led mixed-use development 

Other activities 

2012 
£’000

2011 
 £’000 

2,069,911

 2,061,559 

83,522 

28,558 

2,153,433 

2,090,117 

For the purpose of monitoring segment performance and allocating resources between segments all assets are considered to be 
attributable to residential-led mixed-use development with the exception of investment properties which are held for the Group’s 
investing activities and have therefore been allocated to other activities. 

3 NET FINANCE COSTS 

Finance income 

Finance costs 

Interest payable on bank loans and non-utilisation fees 

Amortisation of facility fees 

Other finance costs 

Net finance costs 

2012 
£’000

2,369

(4,702) 

(2,459) 

(4,620) 

(11,781) 

(9,412)

2011 
 £’000 

 10,056 

(4,130) 

(2,084) 

(5,306) 

(11,520) 

 (1,464) 

Finance income predominantly represents interest earned on cash deposits.
 

Other finance costs represent imputed interest on taxation and on land purchased on deferred settlement terms.
 

Berkeley Annual Report 2012

 123 

Notes to the Consolidated Financial StatementsFinancials 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
4 PROFIT BEFORE TAXATION 

Profit before taxation is stated after charging/(crediting) the following amounts: 

Staff costs (note 5) 

Depreciation of property, plant and equipment (note 10) 

Loss/(profit) on sale of property, plant and equipment 

Rental income from investment properties 

Direct operating expense in relation to investment properties including depreciation 

Operating lease costs 

Fees paid and payable to the Company’s auditor for the audit of the Parent Company 
and consolidated financial statements 

Fees paid and payable to the Company’s auditors for other services: 

– Audit fee for the financial statements of the Company’s subsidiaries pursuant to legislation 

– Services relating to taxation 

– Services relating to the 2011/12 corporate strategic review and return of £13 per share to shareholders 

– Remuneration consultancy services 

– Other services supplied pursuant to legislation 

2012 
£’000

112,795

1,127 

14

(4,029) 

2,786 

1,679

130 

145 

449 

625 

50 

50 

2011 
 £’000 

 85,722 

858 

 (50) 

(535) 

725 

 1,515 

120 

125 

623 

– 

50 

50 

The value of inventories expensed and included in the cost of sales is £687,102,000 (2011: £489,779,000). 

Remuneration paid to the auditors in respect of taxation services was incurred primarily in connection with compliance matters and 
corporate activity in the year. 

Remuneration paid in respect of services provided for the 2011/12 corporate strategic review were one-off in nature, comprising taxation 
and remuneration services towards the implementation of the Group’s strategy to return £13 per share to shareholders over the next 10 
years and the associated 2011 LTIP. 

Remuneration paid to the auditors in respect of other services supplied pursuant to legislation of £50,000 relates to the interim review 
(2011: £50,000). 

In addition to the above services, the Group’s auditor acted as auditor to The Berkeley Final Salary Plan. The appointment of auditors to 
the Group’s pension scheme and the fees paid in respect of the audit are agreed by the trustees of the scheme, who act independently of 
the management of the Group. The fees paid to the Group’s auditors for audit services to the pension scheme during the year were 
£7,000 (2011: £7,000). 

5 DIRECTORS AND EMPLOYEES 

Staff costs 

Wages and salaries 

Social security costs 

Share-based payments 

Pension costs 

2012 
£’000

2011 
 £’000 

88,707

13,168

8,212

2,708

112,795

 68,229 

 10,922 

 4,146 

 2,425 

 85,722 

The average number of persons employed by the Group during the year was 1,139 (2011: 935). 

Key management compensation 
Key management comprises the Main Board, as the Directors are considered to have the authority and responsibility for planning, 
directing and controlling the activities of the Group. Details of Directors’ emoluments are set out in the Remuneration Committee report 
on pages 89 to 105. 

Share-based payments 
The Group operates three equity-settled share based payments schemes. The charge to the income statement in respect of share-based 
payments in the year relating to grants of share options awarded under the 2009 Long-Term Incentive Plan, the 2011 Long-Term Incentive 
Plan and deferred shares or notional shares under the Bonus Plan, was £8,212,000 (2011: £4,146,000). The charge to the income 
statement attributable to key management is £7,121,000 (2011: £3,099,000). 

124  Berkeley Annual Report 2012 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTSNotes to the Consolidated Financial Statements 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
2009 Long-Term Incentive Plan 
Part A 
On 29 June 2009 the balance of the shares originally awarded under the 2004(b) Long-Term Incentive Plan, totalling 5,330,340 shares, 
were replaced by options under Part A of the 2009 Long-Term Incentive Scheme, with an exercise price of £3.00 per share, in accordance 
with the shareholder approval obtained at the Extraordinary General Meeting on 15 April 2009. These will become exercisable by the 
relevant Executive Directors on 31 January 2014, subject to continued employment at that date. During the year, 880,390 options lapsed 
on the departure of a Director, leaving 4,441,950 outstanding. 

Part B 
Part B of the 2009 Long-Term Incentive Plan covers 6,830,000 share options with an exercise price of £8.40. Vesting of the options is in 
two tranches: 50% on 15 April 2015 and 50% on 15 April 2016. The options are conditional on continued employment at the relevant 
vesting date and the satisfaction of the underpin condition that Net Assets per Share are at least £5.94 at 15 April 2015. During the year, 
530,000 options lapsed on the departure of employees, leaving 6,300,000 options outstanding. 

Bonus Plan 
Under the terms of the Bonus Plan set out in the Remuneration Report participants to the plan are entitled to 50% of the balance of their 
plan account at the end of each financial year. The remaining balance is deferred in shares or notional shares. 

2011 Long-Term Incentive Plan 
The Company announced in June 2011 as part of a strategic review of the business a long term plan to return £13 per share 
(approximately £1.7 billion) to shareholders over the next 10 years payable on or before the following milestones: 

30 September 2015 (p) 

30 September 2018 (p) 

30 September 2021 (p) 

Dividend 

434 

433 

433 

A new long term remuneration plan was proposed to support this strategy, the 2011 Long Term Incentive Plan (“2011 LTIP”), which was 
approved by shareholders at the Annual General Meeting on 5 September 2011. The key features of the 2011 LTIP are: 

–	 if the Company returns £13 per share to shareholders over a ten year period via a series of dividend payments by the milestone dates 

referred to above, participants will be entitled to exercise options and receive a number of ordinary shares in the capital of the 
Company at the end of the ten year period. 

–	 the maximum number of shares capable of being earned by all participants are 19,616,503 shares, being 13% of the fully diluted share 

capital of the company at the date of approval of the plan. 

–	 the exercise price of options granted under the 2011 LTIP will be £13 per share less an amount equal to the value of all dividends paid 

between the date of approval of the 2011 LTIP and 30 September 2021, provided the exercise price cannot be less than zero. 

The fair value of the options granted during the year, determined using the current market pricing model was £3.17 for options which vest 
on 30 September 2021. The inputs into the current market option pricing model were: 

Grant date	 

Vesting date	 

Share price at grant gate (p)	 

Exercise price (p)	 

Discount rate	 

Inputs 

5 September 2011 

30 September 2021 

1,236 

nil 

6.3% 

The discount rate was determined by calculating the Group’s expected cost of capital over the vesting period at the grant date. 

Pensions 
During the year, two principal pension schemes were in place for employees. The Berkeley Group plc Group Personal Pension Plan and 
the St George PLC Group Personal Pension Plan are defined contribution schemes. The assets of these schemes were held in separate 
trustee administered funds. 

The Berkeley Final Salary Plan is a defined benefit scheme which was closed to future accrual with effect from 1 April 2007. 

Defined contribution plan 
Contributions amounting to £2,415,000 (2011: £2,155,000) were paid into the defined contribution schemes during the year. 

Berkeley Annual Report 2012

 125 

Notes to the Consolidated Financial StatementsFinancials 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
   
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
5 DIRECTORS AND EMPLOYEES CONTINUED 

Defined benefit plan 
The Berkeley Final Salary Plan is subject to an independent actuarial valuation at least every three years. The most recently finalised 
valuation was carried out as at 1 May 2010 and was finalised in March 2011. The method adopted in the 2010 valuation was the projected 
unit method, which assumed a return on investment both prior to and after retirement of 5.75% per annum and pension increases of 
3.25% per annum. The market value of the Berkeley Final Salary Plan assets at 1 May 2010 was £11,692,000 and was sufficient to cover 
100% of the scheme’s liabilities. Following the finalisation of the 2007 valuation, with effect from 1 July 2008, employer’s required regular 
contributions were reduced to zero. Following the finalisation of the 2011 valuation this position remains unchanged. Notwithstanding this 
the Company made additional voluntary contributions of £575,000 during the year (2011: £600,000). 

For the purposes of IAS 19, the 2010 valuation was updated for 30 April 2012. 

The major assumptions used by the actuary were:

Valuation at: 

Rate of increase in salaries 

Discount rate 

Inflation assumption (RPI) 

Inflation assumption (CPI) 

Rate of increase in pensions in payment post-97 (Pre-97 receive 3% p.a. increases) 

 30 April 
2012

–

4.80%

3.25%

2.50% 

3.25%

30 April 
 2011 

 – 

 5.40% 

 3.40% 

N/A 

 3.40% 

The mortality assumptions are the standard S1PA CMI_2009_X [1.0%] (2011: S1PA CMI_2009_X [1.0%]) base table for males and females, 
both adjusted for each individual’s year of birth to allow for future improvements in mortality rates. The life expectancy of male and female 
pensioners (now aged 65) retiring at age 65 on the balance sheet date is 22.1 years and 24.1 years respectively (2011: 22.0 and 24.0). The 
life expectancy of male and female deferred pensioners (now aged 50) retiring at age 65 after the balance sheet date is 23.1 years and 
25.3 years respectively (2011: 23.0 and 25.2). 

The fair value of the assets and the expected rates of return on the assets were as follows: 

Equities 

Government Bonds (over 15 years) 

Government Bonds (5 to 15 years) 

Corporate Bonds 

Cash 

Fair value of plan assets 

30 April 2012 

30 April 2011 

Long-term 
rate of 
return 

6.95 % 

3.30% 

2.70% 

4.70% 

0.50% 

Long-term 
rate of 
return 

 7.00% 

 4.00% 

0% 

 5.20% 

 0.50% 

Value 
£’000 

6,374

1,627

1,575 

4,077

370

14,023

Value 
£’000 

5,260 

3,694 

N/A 

3,707 

191 

 12,852 

The overall expected rate of return on scheme assets is a weighted average of the individual expected rates of return on each asset class. 

The amounts recognised in the statement of financial position are determined as follows: 

Present value of defined benefit obligations 

Fair value of plan assets 

Net surplus 

Unrecognised asset in accordance with IAS 19 

Net amount recognised on the statement of financial position 

The amounts recognised in the income statement are as follows: 

Current service cost 

Past service cost 

Interest on pension scheme liabilities 

Expected return on plan assets 

Total included within finance income 

126  Berkeley Annual Report 2012 

2012 
£’000

(13,267) 

14,023

756

(756) 

–

2012 
£’000

–

–

661

(714) 

(53) 

2011 
 £’000 

(12,402) 

 12,852 

 450 

(450) 

 – 

2011 
 £’000 

 – 

 – 

 621 

(674) 

(53) 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTSNotes to the Consolidated Financial Statements 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
    
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Changes in the present value of the defined benefit obligation: 

Present value of defined benefit obligations at 1 May 

Current service cost 

Interest on pension scheme liabilities 

Contributions by plan participants 

Actuarial loss on scheme liabilities recognised in the statement of comprehensive income 

Net benefits paid out 

2012 
£’000

12,402

–

661

–

527

(323) 

2011 
 £’000 

 11,445 

 – 

 621 

 – 

 638 

(302) 

Present value of defined benefit obligations at 30 April 

13,267

 12,402 

Changes in the fair value of plan assets: 

Fair value of plan assets at 1 May 

Expected return on plan assets 

Actuarial gains on plan assets recognised in the statement of comprehensive income 

Contributions by the employer 

Contributions by plan participants 

Net benefits paid out 

Fair value of plan assets at 30 April 

Cumulative actuarial gains and losses recognised in equity: 

Cumulative amounts of losses recognised in the statement of comprehensive income at 1 May 

Net actuarial losses recognised in the year 

Change in irrecoverable surplus in accordance with IAS 19 

2012 
£’000

12,852

714

205

575

–

(323) 

2011 
 £’000 

 11,487 

 674 

 393 

 600 

 – 

(302) 

14,023

 12,852 

2012 
£’000

(2,953) 

(322) 

(306) 

2011 
 £’000 

(2,300) 

(245) 

(408) 

Cumulative amounts of losses recognised in the statement of comprehensive income at 30 April 

(3,581) 

(2,953) 

Actual gain on plan assets: 

Expected gain on scheme assets 

Actuarial gain on scheme assets 

Actual gain on scheme assets 

History of asset values, defined benefit obligations, and experience gains and losses: 

2012 
£’000

714

205

919

30 April 
2009 
£’000 

9,412 

(8,275) 

1,137 

2011 
 £’000 

 674 

 393 

 1,067 

30 April 
2008 
£’000 

9,850 

(9,214) 

636 

30 April 
 2011 
 £’000 

12,852 

30 April 
2010 
£’000 

11,487 

(12,402) 

(11,445) 

 450 

42 

30 April 
2012
£’000

14,023 

(13,267) 

756

30 April 
2012 

30 April 
2011 

30 April 
2010 

30 April
2009 

 30 April 
2008 

205 

1.46% 

393 

3.06% 

1,189 

(1,282) 

(1,124) 

10.35% 

(13.62%) 

(11.41%) 

– 

– 

62 

(49) 

67 

90 

(0.50%) 

0.43% 

(0.81%) 

(0.98%) 

Berkeley Annual Report 2012

 127 

Fair value of scheme assets 

Present value of scheme liabilities 

Net surplus in the plan 

Experience adjustments arising on scheme assets: 

Amount (£’000) 

% of scheme assets 

Experience adjustments arising on scheme liabilities: 

Amount (£’000) 

% of the present value of scheme liabilities 

Notes to the Consolidated Financial StatementsFinancials 
 
  
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
6 TAXATION 

The tax charge for the year is as follows: 

Current tax 

UK corporation tax payable 

Adjustments in respect of previous periods 

Deferred tax at 26% (note 17) (2011: 28%) 

Adjustment in respect of change of tax rate from 26% to 24% (note 17) (2011: 28% to 26%) 

Tax on items recognised directly in other comprehensive income is as follows: 

Deferred tax on actuarial loss recognised in the pension scheme (note 17) 

Tax on items recognised directly in equity is as follows: 

Deferred tax in respect of employee share schemes 

2012 
£’000

2011 
 £’000 

(65,481) 

6,005

(59,476) 

4,086

(1,284) 

(44,767) 

 1,285 

(43,482) 

 2,724 

(1,031) 

(56,674) 

(41,789) 

2012 
£’000

151

2012 
£’000

4,172 

2011 
 £’000 

 170 

2011 
 £’000 

2,048 

The tax charge assessed for the year differs from the standard rate of UK corporation tax of 25.83% (2011: 27.84%). The differences are 
explained below: 

Profit before tax 

Tax on profit at standard UK corporation tax rate 

Effects of: 

Expenses not deductible for tax purposes 

Tax effect of share of results of joint ventures 

Adjustments in respect of previous periods – current tax 

Adjustments in respect of deferred tax change of rate from 26% to 24% (2011: 28% to 26%) 

Other 

Tax charge 

2012 
£’000

214,821

55,488

587

566 

(6,005) 

1,284

4,754

56,674

2011 
 £’000 

 136,245 

 37,931 

 664 

(573) 

(1,285) 

 1,031 

 4,021 

 41,789 

The statutory tax rate in 2012 was at 25.83% (11 months at 26%, 1 month at 24%) 

The adjustments in respect of previous periods includes items such as contaminated land relief, research and development relief and 
other timing differences that are not individually significant and have not therefore been separately disclosed. 

The other adjustment predominantly relates to the tax effect of transferring the ownership of certain properties during the year to 
subsidiaries incorporated in overseas tax jurisdictions with different rates to the UK. 

128  Berkeley Annual Report 2012 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTSNotes to the Consolidated Financial Statements 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
  
 
 
 
 
  
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
7 EARNINGS PER ORDINARY SHARE 

Basic earnings per ordinary share is calculated as profit for the financial year attributable to shareholders of the Group divided by the 
weighted average number of shares in issue during the year. 

Profit attributable to shareholders (£’000’s) 

Weighted average number of shares (000’s) 

Basic earnings per ordinary share (p) 

2012 

158,513

131,042

121.0 

2011 

 95,109 

 131,962 

72.1 

For diluted earnings per ordinary share, the weighted average number of shares in issue is adjusted to assume the conversion of all 
potentially dilutive ordinary shares. At 30 April 2012, the Group had four categories of potentially dilutive ordinary shares: 4.4 million 
£3.00 share options under the 2009 LTIP Part A, 6.3 million £8.40 share options under the 2009 LTIP Part B; 19.6 million £nil share options 
under the 2011 LTIP; and 0.5 million shares under the Bonus Plan. 

A calculation is done to determine the number of shares that could have been acquired at fair value based on the aggregate of the 
exercise price of each share option and the fair value of future services to be supplied to the Group which is the unamortised share-based 
payments charge. The difference between the number of shares that could have been acquired at fair value and the total number of 
options is used in the diluted earnings per share calculation. 

Profit used to determine diluted EPS (£’000’s)
 

Weighted average number of shares (000’s) 


Adjustments for: 


Share options – 2009 LTIP Part A (000’s) 


Share options – 2009 LTIP Part B (000’s) 


Share options – 2011 LTIP (000’s)
 

Bonus plan shares (000’s) 


Shares used to determine diluted EPS (000’s) 


Diluted earnings per ordinary share (p) 


8 PROFIT ON DISPOSAL OF SUBSIDIARY 

2012 

158,513

131,042

2011 

95,109 

131,962 

3,252

1,371

4,613

275

3,209 

– 

– 

46 

140,553

135,217 

112.8

70.3 

On 30 September 2011, Berkeley disposed of its 51% shareholding in Winstanley 1 Limited, a company which was established in 2009 to 
develop a postgraduate student scheme at Clapham Junction to be let to students from Imperial College London, who owned the 
remaining 49% of the company. Berkeley’s share of the proceeds of the sale of the company was £75.7 million and this resulted in an 
exceptional profit on disposal of £30.7 million, calculated as follows: 

Non current assets 

Current assets 

Current liabilities 

Non controlling interest 

Net assets disposed 

Expenses related to disposal 

Profit on disposal 

Consideration 

2012 
£’000 

1,172 

47,052 

(4) 

(4,063) 

44,157 

816 

30,695 

75,668 

Berkeley Annual Report 2012

 129 

Notes to the Consolidated Financial StatementsFinancials 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
9 INTANGIBLE ASSETS 

Cost 

At 1 May 2011 and 30 April 2012 

Accumulated amortisation 

At 1 May 2011 and at 30 April 2012 

Net book value 

At 1 May 2011 and at 30 April 2012 

Cost 

At 1 May 2010 and 30 April 2011

Accumulated amortisation 

At 1 May 2010 and at 30 April 2011

Net book value 

At 1 May 2010 and at 30 April 2011

Goodwill 
£’000 

17,159 

– 

17,159 

 17,159 

 – 

 17,159 

The goodwill balance relates solely to the acquisition of the 50% of the ordinary share capital of St James Group Limited, completed on  
7 November 2006, that was not already owned by the Group. The goodwill balance is tested annually for impairment. The recoverable 
amount has been determined on the basis of the value in use of the business using the current five year pre-tax forecasts. Key 
assumptions are as follows: 

(i) Cash flows beyond a five year period are not extrapolated; 

(ii) A pre-tax discount rate of 8.28% (2011: 8.71%) based on the Group’s weighted average cost of capital.
 

The Directors have identified no reasonably possible change in a key assumption which would give rise to an impairment charge.
 

130  Berkeley Annual Report 2012 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTSNotes to the Consolidated Financial Statements 
 
  
 
 
 
   
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
   
 
 
  
 
 
  
 
 
   
10 PROPERTY, PLANT AND EQUIPMENT AND INVESTMENT PROPERTY 

Property, plant and equipment

Cost 

At 1 May 2011 

Additions 

Disposals 

At 30 April 2012 

Accumulated Depreciation 

At 1 May 2011 

Charge for the year 

Disposals

At 30 April 2012 

Net book value 

At 1 May 2011

At 30 April 2012 

Cost 

At 1 May 2010

Additions

Disposals

At 30 April 2011

Accumulated Depreciation 

At 1 May 2010

Charge for the year 

Disposals 

At 30 April 2011

Net book value 

At 1 May 2010

At 30 April 2011

 Freehold 
 property 
£’000 

 Fixtures 
and 
fittings 
£’000 

8,006 

– 

– 

8,006 

217 

133 

 – 

350 

 7,789 

7,656 

6,031 

1,445 

(728) 

6,748 

4,955 

561 

(728) 

4,788 

1,076 

1,960 

Motor 
vehicles 
£’000 

2,816 

835 

(709) 

 Total 
£’000 

16,853 

2,280 

(1,437)

Investment 
 property 
£’000 

28,685 

55,889 

 – 

2,942 

17,696 

84,574 

1,061 

433 

(495) 

999 

6,233 

1,127 

(1,223) 

6,137 

127 

925 

– 

1,052 

1,755 

1,943 

10,620 

11,559 

28,558 

83,522 

 8,006 

5,123 

 – 

 – 

944 

(36) 

 8,006 

6,031 

 93 

124 

– 

 217 

 7,913 

 7,789 

4,638 

345 

(28) 

4,955 

485 

1,076 

2,535 

1,064 

(783) 

2,816 

1,246 

389 

(574) 

1,061 

1,289 

1,755 

15,664 

2,008 

(819)

– 

28,685 

 – 

16,853 

28,685 

5,977 

858 

(602)

6,233 

– 

127 

 – 

127 

9,687 

10,620 

– 

28,558 

Additions to investment property represent the value at cost of completed properties transferred from the Group’s inventory, which are to 
be held for rental purposes. The market value of these properties is £114,500,000 as determined by the Directors taking into account all 
relevant factors including their nature and location. 

£49,700,000 of the investment properties, at cost (2011: £13,700,000), are subject to an agreement with the Homes and Communities 
Agency which requires these properties to be available for rent until at least 31 March 2015, although Berkeley is able to dispose of its 
investment properties prior to this date. 

Berkeley Annual Report 2012

 131 

Notes to the Consolidated Financial StatementsFinancials 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
11 INVESTMENTS 

Unlisted shares at cost 

Loans 

Share of post-acquisition reserves 

Elimination of profit on transfer of inventory to joint ventures 

Details of the principal joint ventures are provided in note 25. 

The movement on the investment in joint ventures during the year is as follows: 

At 1 May 

(Loss)/profit after tax for the year 

Net increase in loans to joint ventures 

Other movements 

At 30 April 

2012 
£’000

15,437

34,556

(2,860) 

(652) 

2011 
 £’000 

 15,687 

 24,538 

(668) 

(882) 

46,481

 38,675 

2012 
£’000

38,675

(2,192)

10,018 

(20)

46,481

2011 
 £’000 

 26,018 

 2,059 

11,038 

 (440) 

 38,675 

Other movements include the reduction in the elimination of profit on transfer of inventory to joint ventures and the acquisition of shares 
in joint ventures. 

The Group’s share of joint ventures’ net assets, income and expenses is made up as follows: 

Non-current assets 

Current assets 

Current liabilities 

Non-current liabilities 

Revenue 

Costs 

Operating (loss)/profit 

Interest charges 

(Loss)/profit before taxation 

Tax charge 

Share of post tax (loss)/profit of joint ventures 

12 INVENTORIES 

Land not under development 

Work in progress 

Completed units 

132  Berkeley Annual Report 2012 

2012 
£’000

–

2011 
 £’000 

 – 

131,776

 146,155 

(41,215) 

(44,080) 

46,481

16,235

(16,603) 

(368)

(1,750) 

(2,118)

(74) 

(2,192)

(46,837) 

(60,643) 

 38,675 

 20,594 

(17,923) 

 2,671 

(543) 

 2,128 

(69) 

 2,059 

2012 
£’000

2011 
 £’000 

360,453

 316,591 

1,422,676

 1,247,553 

68,586

 49,048 

1,851,715

 1,613,192 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTSNotes to the Consolidated Financial Statements 
  
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
13 TRADE AND OTHER RECEIVABLES 

Trade receivables 

Other receivables 

Prepayments and accrued income 

Further disclosures relating to trade receivables are set out in note 23. 

14 CASH AND CASH EQUIVALENTS 

Cash and cash equivalents 

15 BORROWINGS 

Current 

Loan stock 

Bank loans 

Non-current 

Bank loans 

Other loans 

Total borrowings 

2012 
£’000

105,250

6,434

3,526

115,210

2011 
 £’000 

 79,422 

 8,530 

 8,773 

 96,725 

2012 
£’000

2,747 

2011 
 £’000 

266,307 

2012 
£’000

2011 
 £’000 

(9) 

(29) 

(48,121) 

(48,130) 

(200,000) 

(200,029) 

– 

(12,498) 

(60,628) 

(17,720) 

(6,513) 

(224,262) 

Loan stock is unsecured and is repayable on three months notice being given to the Company, with interest rates linked to LIBOR. 

Non-current bank loans include amounts drawn under site specific bank facilities. The loans are secured by a fixed charge over the specific 
assets. Other non-current loans relate to funding provided by the Homes and Communities Agency, subject to an agreement in respect of 
the Group’s rental properties. Further disclosures relating to current and non-current loans are set out in note 23. 

16 TRADE AND OTHER PAYABLES 

Current 

Trade payables 

Deposits and on account contract receipts 

Loans from joint ventures 

Other taxes and social security 

Accruals and deferred income 

Non-current 

Trade payables 

Total trade and other payables 

2012 
£’000

2011 
 £’000 

(369,669) 

(264,963) 

(422,884) 

(471,967) 

(96) 

(13,333) 

(56,725) 

(96) 

(8,950) 

(41,228) 

(862,707) 

(787,204) 

(30,391) 

(51,009) 

(893,098) 

(838,213) 

All amounts included above are unsecured. The total of £13,333,000 (2011: £8,950,000) for other taxes and social security includes 
£8,052,000 (2011: £4,552,000) for Employer’s National Insurance provision in respect of share-based payments. 

Further disclosures relating to current trade and non-current trade payables are set out in note 23. 

Berkeley Annual Report 2012

 133 

Notes to the Consolidated Financial StatementsFinancials 
  
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
  
 
 
 
 
  
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
17 DEFERRED TAX 
The movement on the deferred tax account is as follows:

At 1 May 2011

Transfer from corporation tax receivable

Charged to the income statement at 26% 

Adjustment in respect of change of tax rate from 26% to 24% (note 6) 

Charged to the income statement in year 

Debited to equity at 26% 

Adjustment in respect of change of tax rate from 26% to 24%

Charged to equity in year 

Deferred tax transferred on disposal of subsidiary undertaking 

At 30 April 2012 

At 1 May 2010

Transfer from corporation tax receivable

Charged to the income statement at 28% 

Adjustment in respect of change of tax rate from 28% to 26% (note 6) 

Charged to the income statement in year

Debited to equity at 28%

Adjustment in respect of change of tax rate from 28% to 26%

Charged to equity in year

At 30 April 2011

 Accelerated 
capital 
allowances 
£’000 

 Retirement 
benefit 
obligation 
£’000 

Other 
 short-term 
timing 
 differences 
£’000 

 Total 
£’000 

 525 

 – 

(150) 

(29) 

(179) 

– 

 – 

– 

– 

346 

 746 

 – 

(181) 

(40)

 (221) 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 525

– 

– 

(163)

12 

(151) 

163 

(12) 

151 

– 

– 

– 

– 

(183)

 13 

(170)

183 

(13) 

170 

 – 

18,356 

18,881 

206 

 4,399 

(1,267) 

3,132 

4,956 

(784) 

4,172 

(1,172) 

206 

4,086 

(1,284) 

2,802 

5,119 

(796) 

4,323 

(1,172) 

24,694 

25,040 

14,111 

14,857 

113 

 3,088 

(1,004) 

 2,084 

2,451 

(403) 

2,048 

18,356 

113 

2,724 

(1,031) 

1,693 

2,634 

(416) 

2,218 

18,881 

Deferred tax is calculated in full on temporary differences under the liability method using a tax rate of 24.0% (2011: 26.0%). There is no 
unprovided deferred tax. 

All of the deferred tax assets were available for offset against deferred tax liabilities and hence the net deferred tax asset at 30 April 2012 
was £25,040,000 (2011: £18,881,000). 

Deferred tax assets of £23,069,000 (2011: £15,398,000) are expected to be recovered after more than one year. 

The Finance (No.4) Bill 2012 which became substantively enacted on the 3 July 2012 includes legislation to reduce the main rate of 
corporation tax from 24% to 23% from April 2013. This change had not been substantively enacted at 30 April 2012 and therefore is not 
reflected in these financial statements. 

The effect of the change substantively enacted on 3 July 2012 would be to reduce the value of the deferred tax asset at April 2012 by 
£961,000. 

The deferred tax credited/(charged) to equity during the year was as follows: 

Deferred tax on actuarial loss recognised in the pension scheme 

Deferred tax in respect of employee share schemes 

Movement in the year 

Cumulative deferred tax credited to equity at 1 May 

Cumulative deferred tax credited to equity at 30 April 

134  Berkeley Annual Report 2012 

2012 
£’000

151

4,172

4,323

6,793

11,116

2011 
 £’000 

 170 

 2,048 

 2,218 

 4,575 

 6,793 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTSNotes to the Consolidated Financial Statements 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
18 SHARE CAPITAL AND SHARE PREMIUM 
The movements on allotted, called-up and fully paid share capital for the Company in the year were as follows: 

At 1 May 2010 and 30 April 2011 

At 30 April 2012 

At 1 May 2010 and 30 April 2011 

At 30 April 2012 

Ordinary 
shares 
No. ’000 

134,857 

134,857 

 Share 
 premium 
£’000 

49,315 

49,315 

Share 
capital 
£’000 

6,743 

6,743 

Each ordinary share of 5p is a voting share in the capital of the Company, is entitled to participate in the profits of the Company and on a 
winding-up is entitled to participate in the assets of the Company. 

At 30 April 2012 there were 3,577,506 shares held as ‘treasury shares’ (2011: 3,577,506). The company has the right to re-issue these 
shares at a later date. 

At 30 April 2012 there were 237,363 shares held in trust (2011: 237,363). The market value of these shares at 30 April 2012 was 
£3,040,620 (2011: £2,516,048 ). 

19 RESERVES 
The movement in reserves is set out in the Consolidated Statement of Changes in Equity on page 117. 

Other reserve 
The Other reserve of negative £961,299,000 (2011: negative £961,299,000) arose from the application of merger accounting principles to 
the financial statements on implementation of the capital reorganisation of the Group, incorporating a Scheme of Arrangement, in the 
year ended 30 April 2005. 

Revaluation reserve 
The revaluation reserve consists of balances in relation to two separate transactions. 

The first element arose following the acquisition on 7 November 2006 of the 50% of the ordinary share capital of St James Group Limited 
not already owned. A revaluation reserve of £20,297,000 was originally created in accordance with IFRS 3 through fair value adjustments 
to the 50% of the net assets of St James Group Limited owned by the Group prior to 7 November 2006. Transfers of £nil in the year (2011: 
£35,000) to distributable reserves were recognised as the associated fair value adjustments were charged to the income statement. At  
30 April 2012 the balance in the revaluation reserve relating to the acquisition of St James Group Limited is £2,894,000 (2011: 
£2,894,000). 

The second element arose in 2010 following the acquisition on 23 July 2009 of the shares owned by Saad Investments Company Limited 
and the outstanding shareholder loans in five joint ventures which became fully owned subsidiaries from this date. A revaluation reserve of 
£560,000 was created in accordance with IFRS 3 through fair value adjustments to the 50% of the net assets of the joint ventures owned 
by the Group prior to 23 July 2009. Transfers of £60,000 in the year (2011: £19,000) to distributable reserves were recognised as the 
associated fair value adjustments were charged to the income statement. At 30 April 2012 the balance in the revaluation reserve relating 
to the acquisition of the five entities that were previously joint ventures with Saad Investments Company Limited is £481,000 (2011: 
£541,000). 

Capital redemption reserve fund 
The capital redemption reserve fund was created to maintain the capital of the Company following the redemption of the B Shares 
associated with the Scheme of Arrangement created in 2004 which completed on 10 September 2009 with the re-designation of the 
unissued B shares as ordinary shares. 

Retained earnings 
The Company acquired none (2011: 3,577,506) of its own shares through purchases on the London Stock Exchange in the year. The total 
amount to acquire the shares was £nil (2011: £28,210,179) and has been deducted from retained earnings within shareholders’ equity. 
These shares are held as ‘treasury shares’. 

The Company’s Employee Benefit Trust acquired no shares through purchases on the London Stock Exchange in the year (2011: 233,802). The 
total amount paid to acquire the shares, including expenses, was £nil (2011: £1,791,662) and has been deducted from retained earnings. 

Berkeley Annual Report 2012

 135 

Notes to the Consolidated Financial StatementsFinancials 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
20 CONTINGENT LIABILITIES 
The Group has guaranteed road and performance agreements in the ordinary course of business of £14,521,000 (2011: £16,244,000). 

21 OPERATING LEASES – MINIMUM LEASE PAYMENTS 
The total future minimum lease payments of the Group under non-cancellable operating leases is set out below: 

2012 
£’000

94 

1,754 

8,080 

9,928 

2012 
£’000

158,147

56,674

2,052

14 

(30,695) 

(2,369) 

11,781

2,192 

8,212

2011 
 £’000 

157 

1,684 

8,946 

10,787 

2011 
 £’000 

 94,456 

 41,789 

 985 

(50) 

– 

(10,056) 

 11,520 

(2,059) 

 4,146 

(341,256) 

(387,745) 

(23,423) 

50,310

(575) 

(38,418) 

 81,766 

(600) 

(108,936) 

(204,266) 

2012 
£’000

2011 
 £’000 

(263,560) 

(82,812) 

20

 19 

163,614 

(192,030) 

(99,926) 

(274,823) 

42,045

(57,881)

 316,868 

 42,045 

Operating leases which expire: 

Within one year 

Between one and five years 

After five years 

22 NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED CASH FLOW STATEMENT 
Reconciliation of profit after taxation for the year to cash generated from operations: 

Profit after taxation for the year 

Adjustments for: 

– Taxation 

– Depreciation 

– Loss/(profit) on sale of property, plant and equipment 

– Profit on sale of subsidiary 

– Finance income 

– Finance costs 

– Share of post tax results of joint ventures 

– Non-cash charge in respect of share-based payments 

Changes in working capital: 

– Increase in inventories 

– Increase in trade and other receivables 

– Increase in trade and other payables 

– Decrease in employee benefit obligations 

Cash outflow from operations 

Reconciliation of net cash flow to net (debt)/cash: 

Net decrease in cash and cash equivalents, including bank overdraft 

Net cash outflow from repayment of loan stock 

Net cash inflow/(outflow) from increase in borrowings 

Movement in net cash in the year 

Opening net cash 

Closing net (debt)/cash 

136  Berkeley Annual Report 2012 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTSNotes to the Consolidated Financial Statements 
 
  
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Net (debt)/cash: 

As at 30 April 

Cash and cash equivalents 

Non-current borrowings 

Current borrowings 

Net (debt)/cash 

2012 
£’000

2,747

2011 
 £’000 

 266,307 

(12,498) 

(24,233) 

(48,130) 

(200,029) 

(57,881)

 42,045 

23 CAPITAL MANAGEMENT, FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS AND FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT 
The Group finances its operations by a combination of shareholders’ funds, non-controlling interest, working capital and, where 
appropriate, borrowings. The Group’s objective when managing capital is to maintain an appropriate capital structure in the business to 
allow management to focus on creating sustainable long-term value for its shareholders, with flexibility to take advantage of opportunities 
as they arise in the short and medium term. This allows the Group to take advantage of prevailing market conditions by investing in land 
and work in progress at the right point in the cycle or delivering returns to shareholders through dividends or share buy backs. Last year 
the Group put in place a long-term strategic plan to see £13 per share returned to shareholders over the next 10 years. This plan ensures 
there is sufficient working capital retained in the business to continue investing selectively in new land opportunities as they arise. 

The Group monitors capital levels principally by monitoring net cash/debt levels, cash flow forecasts and return on average capital 
employed. The Group considers capital employed to be net assets adjusted for net cash/debt. Capital employed at 30 April 2012 was 
£1,157,725,000 (2011: £891,733,000). The increase in capital employed in the year of £265,992,000 reflects significant investment in land 
and work in progress during the year. 

The Group’s financial instruments comprise financial assets being: trade receivables and cash and cash equivalents and financial liabilities 
being: loan stock, bank loans, trade payables, deposits and on account receipts, loans from joint ventures and accruals. Cash and cash 
equivalents and borrowing are the principal financial instruments used to finance the business. The other financial instruments highlighted 
arise in the ordinary course of business. 

As all of the operations carried out by the Group are in sterling there is no direct currency risk, and therefore the Group’s main financial 
risks are primarily: 

– liquidity risk – the risk that suitable funding for the Group’s activities may not be available; 

– market interest rate risk – the risk that Group financing activities are adversely affected by fluctuation in market interest rates; and 

– credit risk – the risk that a counterparty will default on their contractual obligations resulting in a loss to the Group. 

Financial instruments: Financial assets 
The Group’s financial assets can be summarised as follows: 

Current 

Trade receivables 

Cash and cash equivalents 

2012 
£’000

2011 
 £’000 

105,250 

2,747

107,997

79,422 

 266,307 

 345,729 

Trade receivables are non-interest bearing. 

Cash and cash equivalents are short-term deposits held at either floating rates linked to LIBOR or fixed rates. 

Berkeley Annual Report 2012

 137 

Notes to the Consolidated Financial StatementsFinancials 
  
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
23 CAPITAL MANAGEMENT, FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS AND FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT CONTINUED 

Financial instruments: Financial liabilities 
The Group’s financial liabilities can be summarised as follows: 

Current 

Loan stock 

Bank loans 

Trade payables 

Deposits and on account contract receipts 

Loans from joint ventures 

Accruals and deferred income 

Non-current 

Trade payables 

Bank loans 

Other loans 

Total financial liabilities 

2012 
£’000

2011 
 £’000 

(9) 

(29) 

(48,121) 

(200,000) 

(369,669) 

(264,963) 

(422,884) 

(471,967) 

(96) 

(96) 

(56,725) 

(41,228) 

(897,504) 

(978,283) 

(30,391) 

– 

(12,498) 

(42,889) 

(51,009) 

(17,720) 

(6,513) 

(75,242) 

(940,393) 

(1,053,525) 

All amounts included above are unsecured, except for the site specific bank loans in 2011 which were secured by a fixed charge over the 
specific assets to which they related. 

Loan stock is repayable on three months notice being given to the Company, with floating interest rates linked to LIBOR. Current bank 
loans have term expiry dates within twelve months of the balance sheet date and are held at floating interest rates linked to LIBOR. Trade 
payables and other current liabilities are non-interest bearing. 

Non-current bank loans have term expiry dates after twelve months from the balance sheet date and are held at floating interest rates 
linked to LIBOR. 

Non current other loans represent a loan from the Homes and Communities Agency on which interest is payable based on a proportionate 
share of the net rental income arising from the properties to which the loan relates. 

The maturity profile of the Group’s non-current financial liabilities, all of which are held at amortised cost, is as follows: 

In more than one year but not more than two years 

In more than two years but not more than five years 

In more than five years 

2012 
£’000

(20,709)

(22,180)

–

(42,889)

2011 
 £’000 

 (31,929) 

 (16,336) 

 (26,977) 

 (75,242) 

The carrying amounts of the Group’s financial assets and financial liabilities approximate to fair value. 

Current trade receivables and current trade and other payables approximate to their fair value as the transactions which give rise to these 
balances arise in the normal course of trade and, where relevant, with industry standard payment terms and have a short period to 
maturity (less than one year). The loan stock is repayable at book value on three months notice being given to the Company. 

Non-current trade payables comprise long-term land creditors, which are held at their discounted present value (calculated by discounting 
expected future cash flows at prevailing interest rates and yields as appropriate). The discount rate applied reflects the nominal, risk-free 
pre-tax rate at the balance sheet date, applied to the maturity profile of the individual land creditors within the total. At 30 April 2012 a 
rate of 0.74% was applied (2011: 1.44%). Non-current loans approximate to fair value as they are held at variable market interest rates 
linked to LIBOR. 

Liquidity risk 
This is the risk that suitable funding for the Group’s activities may not be available. Group management addresses this risk through review 
of rolling cash flow forecasts throughout the year to assess and monitor the current and forecast availability of funding, and to ensure 
sufficient headroom against facility limits and compliance with banking covenants. The committed borrowing facilities are set out below. 

138  Berkeley Annual Report 2012 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTSNotes to the Consolidated Financial Statements 
  
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
The contractual undiscounted maturity profile of the Group’s financial liabilities, included at their carrying value in the preceding tables, is 
as follows: 

In less than one year 

In more than one year but not more than two years 

In more than two years but not more than five years 

In more than five years 

2012 
£’000

2011 
 £’000 

(897,504) 

(978,283) 

(20,983) 

(22,498) 

– 

(32,600) 

(16,633) 

(27,720) 

(940,985) 

(1,055,236) 

Market interest rate risk 
The Group’s cash and cash equivalents and bank loans expose the Group to cash flow interest rate risk. 

The Group’s rolling cash flow forecasts incorporate appropriate interest assumptions, and management carefully assesses expected activity 
levels and associated funding requirements in the prevailing and forecast interest rate environment to ensure that this risk is managed. 

From time to time the Group uses derivative instruments, when commercially appropriate, to manage interest rate risk by altering the 
interest rates on investments and funding so that the resulting exposure gives greater certainty of future costs. During the year and at the 
year end the Group held no such instruments (2011: nil). 

If interest rates on the Group’s cash/debt balances had been 50 basis points higher throughout the year ended 30 April 2012, profit after 
tax for the year would have been £14,000 lower (2011: £124,000 lower). This calculation is based on the monthly closing net cash/debt 
balance throughout the year excluding fixed rate deposits where the deposits were in place prior to 1 May 2011. A 50 basis point increase 
in interest rate represents management’s assessment of a reasonably possible change for the year ended 30 April 2012. The Group’s loan 
stock amounts to £9,000 (2011: £29,000) and so no sensitivity analysis has been prepared against this interest bearing financial liability as 
any impact would not be material. 

Credit risk 
The Group’s exposure to credit risk encompasses the financial assets being: trade receivables and cash and cash equivalents. 

Trade receivables are spread across a wide number of customers, with no significant concentration of credit risk in one area. There has 
been no impairment of trade receivables during the year (2011: £nil), nor are there any provisions held against trade receivables (2011: 
£nil), and no trade receivables are past their due date (2011: £nil). 

The credit risk on cash and cash equivalents is limited because counterparties are leading international banks with long-term  
A credit-ratings assigned by international credit agencies. 

Committed borrowing facilities 
The Group has committed borrowing facilities as follows: 

 Available 
£’000 

Drawn  Undrawn  Termination
date
£’000 
£’000 

 Available 
 £’000 

Drawn 
£’000 

Undrawn 
£’000 

 Termination 
date 

2012 

2011

Revolving credit facility 1 

200,000 

10,000 

190,000 

Nov-13

 200,000 

100,000 

100,000 

Revolving credit facility 2 

250,000 

25,000 

225,000 

Apr-16

 250,000 

100,000 

150,000 

Site specific facility 

– 

– 

– 

–

 68,000 

17,504 

50,496 

Nov-13 

Apr-16 

Sep-20 

450,000 

35,000 

415,000

 518,000 

217,504 

300,496 

The drawn facilities of £35,000,000 do not include unamortised issue costs which are netted off the drawn funds for the purpose of 
disclosing borrowings as set out in note 15. 

At 30 April 2012 the total drawn down balance across both facilities was £35 million. In addition, at 30 April 2012 there were bank bonds 
in issue of £4,696,000 (2011: £10,844,000). 

The Group completed the refinancing of its main banking facilities on 24 May 2012, increasing available facilities from £450 million to 
£525 million, with maturity dates extended to April 2017 in the case of revolving credit facility one and May 2017 in the case of revolving 
credit facility two, a level that is commensurate with the capital structure and requirements of the Group. The revolving credit facilities are 
secured by debentures provided by certain Group holding companies over their assets. The facility agreement contains financial 
covenants, which is normal for such agreements, all of which the Group is in compliance with. 

In the year to 30 April 2012, the Group terminated the site specific facility that it had in place for the development of a student scheme 
at Clapham Junction with Imperial College, as part of the disposal of the Group’s 51% shareholding in Winstanley 1 Limited as referred 
to in Note 8. 

Berkeley Annual Report 2012

 139 

Notes to the Consolidated Financial StatementsFinancials 
  
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
 
24 RELATED PARTY TRANSACTIONS 
The Group has entered into the following related party transactions: 

Transactions with Directors 
i)  During the financial year, Mr A W Pidgley and Mr S Ellis paid £47,771 and £143,442 respectively to Berkeley Homes plc for works 
carried out at their homes under the Group’s own build scheme (2011: £452,458 and £nil respectively). This is a scheme whereby 
eligible employees may enter into an arrangement, at commercial rates, with the Group for the construction or renovation of their own 
home. There were no balances outstanding at the year end. 

ii) Mr A W Pidgley, a Director of the Company, contracted to purchase an apartment, including one parking space, at Ebury Square, 
London, SW1 on 20 March 2012 for £6,050,000 from Berkeley Homes (PCL) Limited, a wholly owned subsidiary of the Company.  
Mr Pidgley is also a Director of Berkeley Homes (PCL) Limited. 

Mr G J Fry, a Director of the Company, contracted to purchase an apartment, including a right to park a single motor car, at Dockside 
House, Chelsea Creek, London, SW6 for £725,000 on 18 May 2012 from St George West London Limited, a wholly owned subsidiary  
of the Company. Mr Fry is also a Director of St George West London Limited. 

As both transactions are in excess of £100,000, they each constitute a substantial property transaction with a Director of the Company 
under sections 190 and 191 of the Companies Act 2006 and are therefore conditional on the approval of shareholders, which will be 
sought at the forthcoming Annual General Meeting on 5 September 2012. 

Both the agreement between Berkeley Homes (PCL) Limited and Mr Pidgley and the agreement between St George West London 
Limited and Mr Fry are a standard form sale and purchase agreement used by the respective companies on the respective 
developments, save that they are conditional upon the agreement of shareholders. In accordance with the terms of the agreements,  
Mr Pidgley and Mr Fry each paid a ten per cent. deposit on exchange of contracts which will only be returned to them in the event that 
shareholders do not approve the transaction. 

Transactions with Joint Ventures 
During the financial year there were no transactions with joint ventures. In 2009 inventory was sold to St Edward Homes Limited for 
£17,411,000 being the share of the transaction attributable to the other venturer in the joint venture. At 30 April 2012 an amount of 
£24,631,000 was outstanding and included within trade receivables (2011: £25,717,000). Loans with joint ventures are disclosed in note 11. 

140  Berkeley Annual Report 2012 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTSNotes to the Consolidated Financial Statements   
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
25 SUBSIDIARIES AND JOINT VENTURES 

(a) Subsidiaries 
At 30 April 2012 the Company had the following principal subsidiary undertakings which have all been consolidated, are registered and 
operate in England and Wales, are all 100% owned and for which 100% of voting rights are held except where stated: 

Residential led mixed-use development 

Berkeley Commercial Developments Limited 

Berkeley First Limited (1) 

Berkeley Homes (Capital) plc (1) 

Berkeley Homes (Carmelite) Limited (4) 

Berkeley Homes (Carnwath Road) Limited (Isle of Man) 

Berkeley Homes (Central London) Limited (1)) 

Berkeley Homes (East Thames) Limited (1) 

Berkeley Homes (Eastern Counties) (1) 

Berkeley Homes (Eastern) Limited (1) 

Berkeley Homes (Fleet) Limited 

Berkeley Homes (Hampshire) Limited (1) 

Berkeley Homes (North East London) Limited (1) 

Berkeley Homes (Oxford & Chiltern) Limited (1) 

Berkeley Homes (PCL) Limited 

Berkeley Homes (South East London) Limited (1) 

Berkeley Homes (Southern) Limited (1) 

Berkeley Homes (Three Valleys) Limited (1) 

Berkeley Homes (Urban Renaissance) Limited (1) 

(1) Agency companies of Berkeley Homes plc 

(2) Agency companies of St George PLC 

Berkeley Homes (West London) Limited (1) 

Berkeley Homes plc 

Berkeley Partnership Homes Limited (1) 

Berkeley Ryewood Limited 

Berkeley Strategic Land Limited 

BH (City Forum) Limited (4) 

St George Battersea Reach Limited (Jersey) 

St George Central London Limited (2) 

St George North London Limited (2) 

St George PLC 

St George South London Limited (2) 

St George West London Limited (2) 

St James (Grosvenor Dock) Limited 

St James Group Limited 

St James Homes Limited 

The Berkeley Group plc (3) 

The Tower, One St George Wharf Limited 

(3) The Berkeley Group plc is the only direct subsidiary of the Parent Company 

(4) The substance of the acquisition of these companies was the purchase of land for development and not of a business, and as such, fair value accounting 

and the calculation of goodwill is not required. 

Other activities 

BRP Investments No.1 Limited (Jersey) 

BRP Investments No.2 Limited (Jersey) 

(b) Joint Ventures 
At 30 April 2012 the Group had an interest in the following joint ventures which have been equity accounted to 30 April and are 
registered and operate in England and Wales and which are 50% owned: 

St Edward Homes Limited 

St Edward Homes Partnership 

The St Edward (Strand) Partnership 

Accounting date 

Principal activity 

30 April 

30 April 

30 April 

Residential-led mixed-use development 

Residential-led mixed-use development 

Residential-led mixed-use development 

Berkeley Annual Report 2012

 141 

Notes to the Consolidated Financial StatementsFinancials 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
INDEPENDENT AUDITORS’ REPORT TO THE MEMBERS 
OF THE BERKELEY GROUP HOLDINGS PLC 

We have audited the Parent Company Financial Statements of The Berkeley Group Holdings plc for the year ended 30 April 2012 which 
comprise the Parent Company Balance Sheet and the related notes. The financial reporting framework that has been applied in their 
preparation is applicable law and United Kingdom Accounting Standards (United Kingdom Generally Accepted Accounting Practice). 

RESPECTIVE RESPONSIBILITIES OF DIRECTORS AND AUDITORS 
As explained more fully in the Directors’ Responsibilities Statement set out on page 111, the Directors are responsible for the preparation 
of the Parent Company Financial Statements and for being satisfied that they give a true and fair view. Our responsibility is to audit and 
express an opinion on the Parent Company Financial Statements in accordance with applicable law and International Standards on 
Auditing (UK and Ireland). Those standards require us to comply with the Auditing Practices Board’s Ethical Standards for Auditors. 

This report, including the opinions, has been prepared for and only for the Company’s members as a body in accordance with Chapter 3 
of Part 16 of the Companies Act 2006 and for no other purpose. We do not, in giving these opinions, accept or assume responsibility for 
any other purpose or to any other person to whom this report is shown or into whose hands it may come save where expressly agreed by 
our prior consent in writing. 

SCOPE OF THE AUDIT OF THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
An audit involves obtaining evidence about the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements sufficient to give reasonable assurance 
that the financial statements are free from material misstatement, whether caused by fraud or error. This includes an assessment of: 
whether the accounting policies are appropriate to the Parent Company’s circumstances and have been consistently applied and 
adequately disclosed; the reasonableness of significant accounting estimates made by the Directors; and the overall presentation of the 
financial statements. In addition, we read all the financial and non-financial information in the Annual Report to identify material 
inconsistencies with the audited financial statements. If we become aware of any apparent material misstatements or inconsistencies we 
consider the implications for our report. 

OPINION ON FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
In our opinion the Parent Company Financial Statements: 

•	 give a true and fair view of the state of the Parent Company’s affairs as at 30 April 2012; 

•	 have been properly prepared in accordance with United Kingdom Generally Accepted Accounting Practice; and 

•	 have been prepared in accordance with the requirements of the Companies Act 2006. 

OPINION ON OTHER MATTERS PRESCRIBED BY THE COMPANIES ACT 2006 
In our opinion: 

•	 the part of the Directors’ Remuneration Report to be audited has been properly prepared in accordance with the Companies Act 2006; and 

•	 the information given in the Directors’ Report for the financial year for which the Parent Company Financial Statements are prepared is 

consistent with the Parent Company Financial Statements. 

MATTERS ON WHICH WE ARE REQUIRED TO REPORT BY EXCEPTION 
We have nothing to report in respect of the following matters where the Companies Act 2006 requires us to report to you if, in our 
opinion: 

•	 adequate accounting records have not been kept by the Parent Company, or returns adequate for our audit have not been received 

from branches not visited by us; or 

•	 the Parent Company Financial Statements and the part of the Directors’ Remuneration Report to be audited are not in agreement with 

the accounting records and returns; or 

•	 certain disclosures of Directors’ remuneration specified by law are not made; or 

•	 we have not received all the information and explanations we require for our audit. 

OTHER MATTER 
We have reported separately on the Consolidated Financial Statements of The Berkeley Group Holdings plc for the year ended 30 April 2012. 

Mark Gill (Senior Statutory Auditor) 

for and on behalf of PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP
 
Chartered Accountants and Statutory Auditors 
London 
19 July 2012 

142  Berkeley Annual Report 2012 

Financials 
	 	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
COMPANY BALANCE SHEET 

As at 30 April 

Fixed assets 

Investments 

Current assets 

Debtors 

Cash at bank and in hand 

Current liabilities 

Creditors (amounts falling due within one year) 

Net current liabilities 

Total assets less current liabilities and net assets 

Capital and reserves 

Called-up share capital 

Share premium 

Capital redemption reserve 

Profit and loss account 

Total shareholders’ funds 

Notes 

2012 
£’000 

2011 
£’000 

C5 

1,391,276

 1,389,101 

1,391,276

 1,389,101 

C6 

4,461

945

5,406

 2,590 

 945 

 3,535 

C7 

(625,296) 

(597,997) 

(619,890) 

(594,462) 

771,386

 794,639 

C8 

C9 

C9 

C9 

C10 

6,743

49,315

24,516

690,812

771,386

 6,743 

 49,315 

 24,516 

 714,065 

 794,639 

The financial statements on pages 143 to 147 were approved by the board of directors on 19 July 2012 and were signed on its behalf by: 

N G Simpkin 
Finance Director 

Berkeley Annual Report 2012

 143 

FinancialsFinancials 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE COMPANY FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
 

C1 ACCOUNTING POLICIES 

Basis of preparation 
These financial statements have been prepared under the historical cost convention and in accordance with the Companies Act 2006, 
where applicable, and applicable accounting standards in the United Kingdom (United Kingdom Generally Accepted Accounting Practice) 
and on the going concern basis. The principal accounting policies are set out below and have been applied consistently throughout the 
year. 

The principal activity of The Berkeley Group Holdings plc (“the Company”) is to act as a holding company. 

The Company has not presented its own profit and loss account as permitted by Section 408 of the Companies Act 2006. 

The Company has not presented its own statement of recognised gains and losses for the year as there are no separate gains or losses 
arising in the year. 

The Berkeley Group Holdings plc has presented a Consolidated Cash Flow Statement in its Consolidated Financial Statements for the year 
ended 30 April 2012, therefore as permitted by the Financial Reporting Standard 1 “Cash flow statements” the Directors have not 
prepared a cash flow statement for the Company. 

Expenditure 
Expenditure is recognised in respect of goods and services received when supplied in accordance with contractual terms. Provision is 
made when an obligation exists for a future liability in respect of a past event and where the amount of the obligation can be reliably 
estimated. 

Pensions 
Pension contributions under defined contribution schemes are charged to the income statement as they fall due. 

Investments 
Investments in subsidiary undertakings are included in the balance sheet at cost less provision for any impairment. 

Deferred taxation 
Deferred tax is recognised in respect of all timing differences that have originated but not reversed at the balance sheet date, where 
transactions or events that result in an obligation to pay more tax in the future or a right to pay less tax in the future have occurred at the 
balance sheet date. 

A net deferred tax asset is recognised as recoverable and therefore recognised only when, on the basis of all available evidence, it can be 
regarded as more likely than not that there will be suitable taxable profits against which to recover carried forward tax losses and from 
which the future reversal of underlying timing differences can be deducted. 

Deferred tax is measured at the average tax rates that are expected to apply in the periods in which the timing differences are expected 
to reverse, based on tax rates and laws that have been enacted or substantively enacted by the balance sheet date. Deferred tax is 
measured on an undiscounted basis. 

Share-based payments 
The Company operates three equity-settled, share-based compensation plans. The fair value of the employee services received in 
exchange for the grant of the options is recognised as an expense. The total amount to be expensed over the vesting period is 
determined by reference to the fair value of the options granted. At each balance sheet date, the Company revises its estimates of the 
number of options that are expected to vest. It recognises the impact of the revision to original estimates, if any, in the profit and loss 
account, with a corresponding adjustment to equity. 

The proceeds received net of any directly attributable transaction costs are credited to share capital (nominal value) and share premium 
when the options are exercised. 

C2 LOSS ON ORDINARY ACTIVITIES BEFORE TAXATION 

Loss on ordinary activities before taxation is stated after charging the following amounts: 

Auditors’ remuneration – audit fees 

2012 
£’000 

12 

2011 
£’000 

12 

No disclosure of other non-audit services has been made as this is included within note 4 of the consolidated financial statements. 

144  Berkeley Annual Report 2012 

Financials 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
C3 DIRECTORS AND EMPLOYEES 

Staff costs 

Wages and salaries 

Social security costs 

Share-based payments 

Pension costs – defined contribution 

2012 
£’000 

4,309 

3,152 

6,037 

41 

13,539 

2011 
£’000 

4,049 

2,007 

2,324 

30 

8,410 

The average number of persons employed by the company during the year was 8, all of whom are Directors (2011: 7). 

Directors 
Details of Directors’ emoluments are set out in the Remuneration Committee report on pages 89 to 105. 

Pensions 
During the year, the Company participated in one of the Group’s pension schemes, The Berkeley Group plc Group Personal Pension Plan. 
Further details on this scheme are set out in note 5 of the Consolidated Financial Statements. Contributions amounting to £41,000 (2011: 
£30,000) were paid into the defined contribution scheme during the year. 

Share-based payments 
The charge to the income statement in respect of share-based payments in the year, relating to grants of shares; share options and 
notional shares awarded under the 2009 Long-Term Incentive Plan, the 2011 Long-Term Incentive Plan and the Bonus Plan was £6,037,000 
(2011: £2,324,000). Further information on the Company’s share incentive schemes are included in the Remuneration Committee Report 
on pages 89 to 105 as well as note 5 to the Consolidated Financial Statements. 

C4 THE BERKELEY GROUP HOLDINGS PLC PROFIT AND LOSS ACCOUNT 

The loss for the year in the Company is £31,465,000 (2011: loss of £24,169,000). 

C5 INVESTMENTS 

Investments in shares of subsidiary undertaking at cost at 1 May 

Additions 

Investment in shares of subsidiary undertaking at cost at 30 April 

Details of principal subsidiaries are given within note 25 of the Consolidated Financial Statements. 

C6 DEBTORS 

Current 

Deferred tax 

The movements on the deferred tax asset are as follows: 

At 1 May 

Realisation of deferred tax asset on vesting of employee share scheme 

Deferred tax in respect of employee share schemes credited to equity 

At 30 April 

2012 
£’000 

2011 
£’000 

1,389,101 

1,387,279 

2,175 

1,822 

1,391,276

 1,389,101 

2012 
£’000 

2011 
£’000 

4,461

 2,590 

2012 
£’000 

2,590

–

1,871

4,461

2011 
£’000 

 1,745 

 – 

 845 

 2,590 

Berkeley Annual Report 2012

 145 

FinancialsFinancials 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE COMPANY FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

C7 CREDITORS: AMOUNTS FALLING DUE WITHIN ONE YEAR 

Other taxes and social security 

Amounts owed to subsidiary undertakings 

2012 
£’000 

(5,349) 

2011 
£’000 

(3,082 ) 

(619,947) 

(594,915) 

(625,296) 

(597,997) 

All amounts included above are unsecured. The interest rate on £577,745,000 of the balance owed to subsidiary undertakings is 4.0%. At 
30 April 2012 all other amounts owed to subsidiary undertakings are at floating rates linked to LIBOR and have no fixed repayment date. 

C8 CALLED-UP SHARE CAPITAL 

The authorised share capital of the Company in the year was as follows: 

At 30 April 

Ordinary share capital 

Redeemable preference shares of £1 each 

2012
No. ’000 

 2011 
No. ’000 

925,000 

925,000 

50 

50 

Each ordinary share of 5p is a voting share in the capital of the Company, is entitled to participate in the profits of the Company and on a 
winding-up is entitled to participate in the assets of the Company. 

The movements on allotted, called-up and fully paid share capital for the Company in the year were as follows:

At 1 May 2010 and 30 April 2011 

At 30 April 2012 

At 1 May 2010 and 30 April 2011 

At 30 April 2012 

 Ordinary 
shares 
No. ’000 

134,857 

134,857 

 Share 
 premium 
£’000 

49,315 

49,315

Share 
capital 
£’000 

6,743 

6,743 

At 30 April 2012 there 3,577,506 shares held as ‘treasury shares’ (2011: were 3,577,506). The Company has the right to re-issue these 
shares at a later date. 

At 30 April 2012 there were 237,363 shares held in trust (2011: 237,363). The market value of these shares at 30 April 2012 was 
£3,040,620 (2011: £2,516,048). 

The movements in the year are disclosed in note 18 of the Consolidated Financial Statements. 

C9 RESERVES 

At 1 May 2011 

Loss for the financial year 

Credit in respect of employee share schemes 

At 30 April 2012 

146  Berkeley Annual Report 2012 

Share 
premium 
£’000 

Capital 
redemption 
reserve 
£’000 

Profit and 
loss account 
£’000 

Total 
£’000 

49,315 

24,516 

714,065 

787,896 

– 

– 

– 

– 

(31,465) 

(31,465) 

8,212 

8,212 

49,315 

24,516 

690,812 

764,643 

Financials 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
C10 RECONCILIATION OF MOVEMENTS IN SHAREHOLDERS’ FUNDS 

Loss for the financial year 

Purchase of own shares 

Credit in respect of employee share scheme 

Opening equity shareholders’ funds 

Closing equity shareholders’ funds 

C11 RELATED PARTY TRANSACTIONS 

2012 
£’000 

(31,465) 

– 

8,212 

2011 
£’000 

(24,169) 

(30,002) 

4,146 

(23,253) 

(50,025) 

794,639 

771,386 

844,664 

794,639 

The Company is exempt under the terms of Financial Reporting Standard 8 “Related party disclosures” from disclosing related party 
transactions with entities that are part of The Berkeley Group Holdings plc or investees of The Berkeley Group Holdings plc. Disclosures in 
respect of transactions with Directors of the Company are set out in note 24 of the Consolidated Financial Statements. 

Berkeley Annual Report 2012

 147 

FinancialsFinancials 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Five year summary 

FIVE YEAR SUMMARY 

Years ended 30 april 

Income statement 

Revenue 

2012
£’000

 2011 
 £’000 

2010 
£’000 

2009 
£’000 

2008 
£’000 

1,041,069

 742,612 

615,303 

702,192 

991,465 

Operating profit 

226,425

 135,650 

106,219 

124,842 

206,018 

Share of post tax results of joint ventures 

Net finance (costs)/income 

Profit before taxation 

Taxation 

Profit after taxation 

Profit attributable to: 

Shareholders 

Non-controlling interest 

Basic earnings per ordinary share 

Statement of financial position 

Capital employed 

Net (debt)/cash 

Net assets 

Non-controlling interest 

Shareholders’ funds 

(2,192)

(9,412) 

214,821

(56,674) 

158,147

 2,059 

(1,464)

 136,245 

(41,789) 

 94,456 

158,513

 95,109 

(366) 

(653) 

158,147

121.0p 

 94,456 

72.1p 

(261) 

 4,383 

110,341 

(30,816) 

79,525 

79,674 

(149)

79,525 

60.0p 

(902) 

(3,558) 

120,382 

(34,255) 

86,127 

(2,416) 

(9,294) 

194,308 

(56,481) 

137,827 

86,127 

137,827 

 – 

– 

86,127 

137,827 

71.3p 

114.2p 

1,157,715

(57,881)

1,099,834

 891,733 

 42,045 

 933,778 

– 

(4,364) 

545,448 

316,868 

862,316 

(3,720)

516,520 

284,776 

801,296 

 – 

685,956 

(4,549) 

681,407 

– 

1,099,834

 929,414 

858,596 

801,296 

681,407 

Net assets per share attributable to shareholders (1) 

839p 

709p 

637p 

615p 

564p 

Ratios and statistics 

Return on capital employed (2) 

Return on shareholders’ funds after tax (3) 

Return on shareholders’ funds before tax (4) 

Units sold (5) 

21.9% 

15.6% 

21.2% 

3,565

19.2% 

10.6%

15.3% 

 2,544 

20.1% 

 9.6% 

13.3% 

2,201 

20.6% 

11.6% 

16.2% 

1,501 

29.3% 

18.8% 

26.6% 

3,167 

(1) Net assets attributable to shareholders divided by the number of shares in issue excluding shares held in treasury and shares held by the employee  

benefit trust. 

(2) Calculated as profit before interest and taxation (including joint venture (loss)/profit before tax) divided by the average net assets adjusted for (debt)/cash. 

(3) Calculated as profit after taxation attributable to shareholders as a percentage of the average of opening and closing shareholders’ funds. 

(4) Calculated as profit before taxation attributable to shareholders as a percentage of the average of opening and closing shareholders’ funds. 

(5) The number of units legally completed and taken to sales in the year excluding joint ventures. 

148  Berkeley Annual Report 2012 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
FINANCIAL DIARY
 

Financial Diary 

Annual General Meeting and Interim Management Statement 

Half Year End 

Interim Results Announcement for the six months ending 31 October 2012 

Interim Management Statement 

Year End 

Preliminary Announcement of Results for the year ending 30 April 2013 

Publication of 2012/13 Annual Report 

5 September 2012 

31 October 2012 

7 December 2012 

March 2013 

30 April 2013 

June 2013 

July 2013 

REGISTERED OFFICE AND ADVISORS
 

REGISTERED OFFICE AND pRINCIpAL pLACE OF buSINESS 

Berkeley House 
19 Portsmouth Road 
Cobham 
Surrey KT11 1JG 
Registered number: 5172586 

REGISTRARS 

Capita Registrars 
The Registry 
34 Beckenham Road 
Beckenham 
Kent BR3 4TU 
Tel: 0871 664 0300 

CORpORATE bROkER AND FINANCIAL ADVISOR 

UBS Investment Bank 

ShARE pRICE INFORmATION 

The Company’s share capital is listed on the London Stock Exchange. 
The latest share price is available via the Company’s website at 
www.berkeleygroup.co.uk 

SOLICITORS 

Ashurst LLP 
Skadden, Arps, Slate Meager & Flom (UK) LLP 

bANkERS 

Barclays Bank PLC 
Lloyds TSB Bank plc 
Santander UK plc 
Svenska Handelsbanken AB (Publ) 
The Royal Bank of Scotland Plc 

i

F
n
a
n
c
i
a
l
s

berkeley Annual Report 2012

 149 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
FINANCIAL DIARY

REGISTERED OFFICE AND ADVISORS

REGISTERED OFFICE AND pRINCIpAL pLACE OF buSINESS

Berkeley House

19 Portsmouth Road

Cobham

Surrey KT11 1JG

Registered number: 5172586

REGISTRARS

Capita Registrars

The Registry

34 Beckenham Road

Beckenham

Kent BR3 4TU

Tel: 0871 664 0300

CORpORATE bROkER AND FINANCIAL ADVISOR

UBS Investment Bank

ShARE pRICE INFORmATION

The Company’s share capital is listed on the London Stock Exchange.

The latest share price is available via the Company’s website at

www.berkeleygroup.co.uk

Skadden, Arps, Slate Meager & Flom (UK) LLP

SOLICITORS

Ashurst LLP

bANkERS

Barclays Bank PLC

Lloyds TSB Bank plc

Santander UK plc

Svenska Handelsbanken AB (Publ)

The Royal Bank of Scotland Plc

The Berkeley Group Holdings plc 
Berkeley House 
19 Portsmouth Road 
Cobham 
Surrey KT11 1JG 
UK 

T  +44 (0)1932 868555 
F  +44 (0)1932 868 667 
www.berkeleygroup.co.uk 

Design by Hunter Design 

Printed in England by Alito Group 
This report is printed on Thruxton Silk and Zen 

F

i

n

a

n

c

i

a

l

s

Our vision 
for the future